JP6679556B2 - Amusement machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine.

  As a gaming machine, a game ball, which is a game medium, is launched into a game area by a launching device, and when a game ball wins a winning area such as a winning opening provided in the game area, a predetermined prize value is given to the player. There is one configured in. Further, a variable display means capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "fluctuation") is provided, and when the display result of the variable display of the identification information is the specific display result on the variable display means, a predetermined game value is given. There is one configured to give the player (so-called pachinko machine).

  The prize value is to pay out the prize balls or give points or prizes according to the winning of the game balls in the prize area. In addition, the game value is that the state of the variable winning ball device provided in the game area of the gaming machine is advantageous for the player who easily hits the ball when the specific display result is obtained, and That is, the right to generate an advantageous state is generated, and the condition for paying a prize ball is easily established.

  In the pachinko gaming machine, as a display result of the variable display of the special symbol (identification information) which is started in the variable display means based on the fact that the game ball has won in the starting winning opening, a predetermined specific display mode is derived and displayed. When it is done, "big hit (advantageous state)" occurs. The derivation display is to stop and display the symbol. When a big hit occurs, for example, the big winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and a big hit game state in which a hit ball is easy to win is entered. Then, in each opening period, when a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winning holes are won, the winning holes are closed. The number of times the special winning opening is opened is fixed to a predetermined number (for example, 16 rounds). It should be noted that the opening time (for example, 29 seconds) is determined for each opening, and the special winning opening is closed when the opening time elapses even if the number of winnings does not reach the predetermined number. Hereinafter, the opening period of each special winning opening may be referred to as a round.

  Some of such gaming machines are configured to be able to display a specific display corresponding to the variable display, and to be able to execute a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display. For example, Patent Literature 1 discloses a gaming machine that can switch between a production mode in which a change production can be executed and a production mode in which no change production is executed.

JP-A-2016-154643 (paragraph 0007, FIG. 30)

  However, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a possibility that the player may feel uncomfortable by using a common display layout related to the specific display in a plurality of effect modes having different execution ratios of change effects. is there.

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine that does not give a player a feeling of strangeness when there are a plurality of effect modes in which the execution rates of specific effects are different.

  The present invention adopts the following means in order to solve the above problems. The reference numerals used in the description of the embodiments for carrying out the invention and the drawings described later are added for reference, but the constituent elements of the present invention are not limited to those having the reference numerals.

The gaming machine of the means A is
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of displaying a predetermined image,
Corresponding to the pending storage that is information regarding variable display, a plurality of information including a specific display, effect display means capable of displaying in a specific display area in the display means,
Determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed,
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect including a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
The production mode in the variable display, the production mode control means capable of controlling in a plurality of production modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution rate of the specific production are different,
Of the display layout of the effect display means, the display layout related to the specific display differs depending on the effect mode,
The effect mode control means is a first effect mode in which a specific display can be displayed during variable display and the specific effect can be executed, and a second effect in which the specific display is hidden during variable display and the specific effect is not executed. Controllable to the mode,
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect that reduces the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when controlled in the first effect mode and in the second effect mode. Execution means,
In the execution period of the predetermined effect, in the predetermined display area, a holding storage number notification unit for notifying the number of holding storage in an area different from the specific display area,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate when controlled in the second effect mode than when controlled in the first effect mode,
During the execution period of the predetermined effect when controlled to the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a special effect that is not executed when controlled to the first effect mode in the predetermined display area,
In the display means, it is possible to display common information in the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
It is characterized by
Also, as a gaming machine of means 1,
It is a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine 1) that can be variably displayed (variable display of special symbols, variable display of effect symbols) and controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state, etc.) advantageous to the player.
Rendering capable of displaying a plurality of information (holding display, first holding display guides 1001a to 1001d, second holding display guides 1002a to 1002d) including a specific display (holding display) corresponding to holding storage that is information regarding variable display Display means (first hold storage display section 9a, second hold storage display section 9b),
Determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed (a part of the game control microcomputer 560 that executes steps S220 and S222),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, it is possible to execute a specific effect (a look-ahead notice effect including a hold notice effect) that includes a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display (a hold notice effect that changes a display state of the hold display). Specific effect executing means (a part of the effect control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114),
In the production mode in the variable display, a plurality of production modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution rate of the specific production are different (a sunny mode and a rain mode in which the hold display can be visually confirmed and the hold advance notice production can be executed, The production mode control means (in FIG. 66, the production control microcomputer 100 in FIG. 66) produces a background image according to the selected production mode, in which the suspension display is invisible and the suspension notice production is not executed. When it is displayed on the device 9, the hold display can be displayed in the sunny mode and the rain mode, and the hold display can be hidden in the thunder mode).
The display layout related to the specific display among the display layouts of the effect display means differs depending on the effect mode (in the clear mode and the rain mode, the active display and the hold display, the active display guide 1000, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d). , and the second hold display guide 1002a~1002d is, although both are displayed, in lightning mode, the above information is all hidden), it may be characterized by.
With such a configuration, when there are a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to apply a display layout according to the effect modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

As a gaming machine of means B,
A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of displaying a predetermined image,
A plurality of information including a specific display corresponding to the variable display, effect display means capable of displaying in a specific display area in the display means,
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition related to variable display is satisfied,
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect including a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
The production mode in the variable display, the production mode control means capable of controlling in a plurality of production modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution rate of the specific production are different,
Of the display layout of the effect display means, the display layout related to the specific display differs depending on the effect mode,
The effect mode control means is a first effect mode in which a specific display can be displayed during variable display and the specific effect can be executed, and a second effect in which the specific display is hidden during variable display and the specific effect is not executed. Controllable to the mode,
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect that reduces the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when controlled in the first effect mode and in the second effect mode. Execution means,
In the execution period of the predetermined effect, in the predetermined display area, a holding storage number notification unit for notifying the number of holding storage in an area different from the specific display area,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate when controlled in the second effect mode than when controlled in the first effect mode,
During the execution period of the predetermined effect when controlled to the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a special effect that is not executed when controlled to the first effect mode in the predetermined display area,
In the display means, it is possible to display common information in the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
It is characterized by
Also, as a gaming machine of means 2,
Variable display (in the case of pachinko gaming machine 1, variable display of special symbols, variable display of effect symbols, in the case of slot machines, a plurality of identifiable symbols are arranged on the outer periphery in a predetermined order on the left reel, The reel and the right reel are rotated), and a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (a big hit gaming state in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, an AT, an RT, an ART, etc. in the case of a slot machine) that is advantageous to the player ( Pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Specific display corresponding to the variable display (holding display and active display in the case of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and AT, RT, ART, etc. in the case of a slot machine, each of which is controlled to that advantageous state when the advantageous state is won. Specific display means capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the game (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the first pending storage display section 9a, the second pending storage display section 9b, and the active display guide 1000, in the case of a slot machine, a presentation effect) An effect display means (effect display device 9 etc.) capable of displaying a plurality of information including a liquid crystal display capable of displaying a specific display, the display of which is controlled by a sub control unit (sub CPU) mounted on the control board.
Judgment means for judging whether or not a predetermined condition related to the variable display is satisfied (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a part of the game control microcomputer 560 which executes steps S220, S222 and S61, in the case of a slot machine. The main control unit (main CPU), at the start of the game (immediately after operating the start switch), based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag stored in the RAM, AT lottery, RT lottery, and ART Part of performing lottery of, and adding the number of times of AT, RT, and ART),
Based on the determination result of the determination means, a change effect that changes the specific display mode to a specific mode (for example, a special mode of a triangle or a quadrangle, a blue mode, a red mode) that suggests that the predetermined condition is satisfied. It is possible to execute specific effects including (holding notice effect, active notice effect in case of pachinko gaming machine 1 and effect that changes display mode of specific display corresponding to unexecuted game or game in case of slot machine) A specific effect executing means (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a microcomputer 100 for effect control, in the case of a slot machine, a sub controller (sub CPU)),
In the production mode during variable display, a plurality of production modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution rate of the specific production are different (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the suspended display can be visually confirmed and the suspended notice production can be executed) A production mode control unit (in FIG. 66, production mode control means capable of controlling in a sunny mode and a rain mode, a lightning mode in which the hold display is invisible and the suspension notice production is not executed, and in the case of a slot machine, each production mode corresponding to these) When the control microcomputer 100 displays the background image according to the selected effect mode on the effect display device 9, it is possible to display the hold display in the sunny mode and the rain mode, and in the lightning mode. A portion for setting the hold display to be non-display, a sub control unit (sub CPU) in the case of a slot machine,
The display layout related to the specific display among the display layouts of the effect display means varies depending on the effect mode (in the case of the pachinko game machine 1, in the clear mode and the rain mode, the active display and the hold display, and the active display guide 1000, Both the 1st hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the 2nd hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed, but in the lightning mode, all of this information is hidden. In the case of a slot machine, a clear mode and a rain mode. to the effect mode corresponding for being displayed specific display does not show the specific display in effect mode corresponding to lightning mode), it may be characterized by.
With such a configuration, when there are a plurality of effect modes, it is possible to apply a display layout according to the effect modes, and it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

The gaming machine of means 3 is
A gaming machine of means 1 or 2,
The effect mode control means is capable of displaying a specific display during variable display and capable of executing the specific effect (a clear mode and a rain mode in the case of a pachinko gaming machine 1, and a first mode in the case of a slot machine). Corresponding production mode) and a second production mode in which the specific display is hidden during variable display and the specific production is not executed (lightning mode in the case of a pachinko gaming machine 1 and production mode corresponding to this in the case of a slot machine) And can be controlled to
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, in the second effect mode in which the specific effect is not executed, the specific display is hidden during the variable display, so that the special display is displayed even though the specific effect is not executed. Can be prevented.

The gaming machine of means 4 is
A gaming machine of means 3 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Equipped with effect display means (effect display device 9 etc.) including the specific display means,
The display layout for information different from the specific display is different between the first effect mode and the second effect mode (in the lightning mode, unlike the fine mode and the rain mode, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, 2 hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, active display guide 1000, etc. are not displayed),
It is characterized by the following.
With such a configuration, it is possible to apply an appropriate display layout according to each of the first effect mode and the second effect mode.

The gaming machine of means 5 is
A gaming machine of means 3 or 4 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Equipped with a motion detection means (a push sensor 124, a production control board 80 to which the tilt direction sensor unit 123 is connected, etc.) capable of detecting a motion of the player (operation of the push button 120, operation of the stick controller 122, etc.),
The effect mode control means switches between the first effect mode and the second effect mode based on the operation of the player,
It is characterized by the following.
With such a configuration, the player can select which of the first effect mode and the second effect mode the game is to be played in.

The gaming machine of means 6 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 3 to 5 (pachinko gaming machine 1),
Reservation storage means capable of storing a plurality of reservation storages (production control including a RAM having a first reservation storage number storage area for storing a first reservation storage number and a second reservation storage number storage area for storing a second reservation storage number) Microcomputer 100),
Informing means for recognizably informing the number of holding memories regardless of whether or not the second effect mode is controlled (first holding storage number special display area 1011 for displaying the first holding storage number, second holding A second reserved storage number special display area 1012) for displaying the storage number,
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, the player can recognize the number of holding memories even when being controlled to the second effect mode.

The gaming machine of means 7 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means 3 to 6 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
In a display device (production display device 9 or the like) capable of displaying a specific display (hold display, active display), common information can be displayed regardless of the production mode (for example, the remaining variable display that can be executed in the probability variation state). The number of times (so-called remaining ST times in ST machines), the number of remaining variable displays that can be executed in the time saving state, the number of consecutive holidays, the number of balls in the consecutive holidays, etc. are displayed in any of the effect modes),
It is characterized by the following.
With such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately display the information to be displayed regardless of the effect mode.

The gaming machine of means 8 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means 3 to 7 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
As the first effect mode, there are a plurality of effect modes in which the execution rate of the specific effect is different (the execution rate of the hold announcement effect in the rain mode is lower than the execution rate of the hold announcement effect in the sunny mode),
It is characterized by the following.
According to such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest by the variety of the first effect modes.

The gaming machine of means 9 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 3 to 8 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Determining means for deciding whether or not to control to the advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, executes steps S220, S222, S61 in the game control microcomputer 560). Partial, in the case of a slot machine, the main control unit (main CPU) draws the AT based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated). , RT lottery, ART lottery, and a portion for performing AT, RT, and ART times addition lottery),
Based on the determination result by the determining means, a notice effect executing means (a notice controlling microcomputer in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a notice effect (a notice effect during change) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled. 100, a slot machine is equipped with a sub control unit (sub CPU),
The type of the notice effect differs depending on the effect mode (there are effects that are not executed in the sunny mode and the rain mode but can be executed only in the lightning mode (blackout notification, lightning effect effect notification)),
It is characterized by the following.
With such a configuration, it is possible to make the advance notice effect executed in each effect mode interested.

The gaming machine of means 10 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 3 to 9 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
Determining means for deciding whether or not to control to the advantageous state before the display result of the variable display is derived and displayed (in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1, executes steps S220, S222, S61 in the game control microcomputer 560). Partly, in the case of a slot machine, the main control unit (main CPU) starts the game (immediately after the start switch is operated),
Based on the determination result by the determining means, a notice effect executing means (a notice controlling microcomputer in the case of the pachinko gaming machine 1) capable of executing a notice effect (a notice effect during change) for notifying that the advantageous state is controlled. 100, a slot machine is equipped with a sub control unit (sub CPU),
A common type of notice production can be executed regardless of the production mode (cut-in notice after the reach state is established can be executed in any production mode),
It is characterized by the following.
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the number of types of notice effects from increasing and the control load from increasing.

The gaming machine of means 11 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 1 to 10 (pachinko gaming machine 1, slot machine),
As the change effect, the specific effect execution means displays the specific display in the first mode (e.g., special hold. Normal hold may be used) and then changes the display mode of the specific display (e.g., action effect. Accompanying pending notice effect) can be executed (for example, a part of the effect control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114).
The display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode and the second mode with high advantage (for example, blue hold, red hold),
The specific effect execution means,
As the change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (for example, shown in FIGS. 40D and 40E). When executing the pending notice effect based on the change patterns 33 to 36 and the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41G to 41I, the special hold is changed to the blue hold or the red hold),
Depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, the change effect can be executed at a different ratio after the change effect (for example, even if the effect effect is executed in the hold notice effect, the special hold does not change. , After that, the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but when the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and it changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold. , After that, the effect production is not executed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the case where the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of means 12 is
A gaming machine of means 11,
As the change effect, the specific effect execution unit does not change the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (for example, blue hold or red hold) after displaying the specific display in the first mode (for example, special hold). In this case, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (for example, normal hold) can be executed (for example, in the change patterns 31 and 32 shown in FIG. 40C and FIG. 41F). It is possible to execute the pending notice effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the means 13 is
A gaming machine of means 12,
The specific effect executing means is characterized by displaying a specific display in a normal mode (for example, normal hold) as a first mode (see FIG. 52).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the means 14 is
A gaming machine of means 12,
The specific effect execution means displays the specific display in a special mode (for example, special hold) different from the normal mode as the first mode (for example, change patterns 31 to 36 and change patterns 31 to 36 shown in FIGS. 40C to 40E). When executing the hold announcement effect based on the change patterns 401 to 414 shown in FIG. 41, the special hold is temporarily displayed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

The gaming machine of the means 15 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means 12 to 14,
The specific effect execution means is an effect effect executed in a mode that acts on the specific display displayed in the first mode (for example, FIG. 50 (5), FIG. 50 (8), FIG. 51 (5), FIG. 51 ( It is possible to execute a change effect including the action effect of the mode shown in 8) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S8013 and S8105 in accordance with the process table selected in step S8010, and thereby the preliminary announcement effect). To execute the effect production),
It is possible to execute the action effect a plurality of times with respect to the specific display displayed in the first aspect of No. 1 (for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. After the hold is displayed, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, but the special hold remains unchanged, and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold is changed to the normal hold. It can be changed).
With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of performing the change effect.

The gaming machine of means 16 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 12 to 15,
When the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the advantage is higher than when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the first mode changes to the second mode ( For example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change patterns 411 and 414) in which the red hold is finally displayed even when the special hold is returned to the normal hold is provided, and only when the super-reach jackpot is hit. , Change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined).
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed in the third mode.

The gaming machine of the means 17 is
Any one of the gaming machines selected from the means 12 to 16,
A limiting unit that limits the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect (for example, a portion that executes steps S6005X, S6007X, S6009, and S6010 in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment) is provided. It is characterized by
With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when executing the change effect.

The gaming machine of the means 18 is
Any of the gaming machines selected from the means 11 to 17,
The specific display means includes at least a normal mode (for example, “white”), a first specific mode (for example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode, and a second specific mode that suggests performance contents ( For example, the specific display can be displayed in any display mode including the effect suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-relational suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) (for example, the third special suggestion mode). In the embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714),
A performance executing means capable of executing a performance of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment, selected in the same processing as steps S8010 and S8011 in the microcomputer 100 for performance control). By performing the same processing as steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table described above, the special zone effect, the pseudo-link effect, and the part that can execute the super reach effect) are provided.
When the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode is executed after the specific display unit displays the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, the effect of the suggested content is executed. After 5 seconds, the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment, effect control microcomputer 100 causes steps S4702, S4705, and S4702). By executing S4708, S4711, or S4714, when any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display or the active display which is displayed in the effect suggestion display mode which is the second display mode. The display can be changed to "red" which is the first specific mode).
With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific aspect.

  For example, in JP-A-2014-168556 (paragraphs 0365-0368, FIG. 43), a change effect of a mode in which a white arrow flies is performed, and if a white arrow is stabbed in a specific display, a success pattern that changes to a special mode is described. , It is described that there is a failure pattern that does not change unless the white arrow is pierced on the specific display. However, in the gaming machine described in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2014-168556, the change effect becomes monotonous, and there is a possibility that the interest when the change effect is executed cannot be sufficiently improved. Therefore, it is an object of the invention according to means A1 to A8 to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the interest when a change effect is executed.

(Means A1) The gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of performing variable display, and a specific display capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display (for example, hold display. Active display may be used). After the specific display is displayed by the means (for example, the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b) and the first mode (for example, the special suspension. The normal suspension may be used), the specific display is displayed. Change effect execution means capable of executing a change effect (for example, a pending notice effect accompanied by an effect effect) that changes the aspect (for example, a part of the effect control microcomputer 100 that executes steps S800A, S8004 to S8010, and S8106 to S8114). And the display mode of the specific display includes at least the first mode and the second mode having a high degree of advantage (for example, blue hold, red hold). Rarely, the change effect executing means can execute, as the change effect, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode after displaying the specific display in the first mode (for example, FIG. 40 (D)). , (E) and the change patterns 405 to 414 shown in FIGS. 41 (G) to (I), the special notice hold is changed to the blue hold or the red hold. Depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, it is possible to execute the change effect at a different rate after the change effect (for example, even if the effect effect is executed in the hold notice effect, the special hold is changed. If it is not done, the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold is changed to blue. When changed to hold or red hold, then action effect is not executed) be characterized. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the interest in the case where the change effect is executed.

(Means A2) In the means A1, the change effect execution means displays the specific display as the change effect in the first mode (for example, special hold) and then displays the display mode of the specific display in the second mode (for example, blue hold). When the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode (for example, normal hold) when it is not changed to (for example, red hold), it is possible to execute an effect (for example, change patterns 31, 32 shown in FIG. 40C). And the pending notice effect based on the change patterns 401 to 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F) can be executed). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means A3) In the means A2, the change effect executing means may be configured to display the specific display in the normal mode (for example, normal hold) as the first mode (see FIG. 52). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means A4) In the means A2, the change effect executing means causes the specific display to be displayed in a special mode (for example, special hold) different from the normal mode as the first mode (for example, in FIGS. 40C to 40E). In the case of executing the hold announcement effect based on the change patterns 31 to 36 shown and the change patterns 401 to 414 shown in FIG. 41, the special hold may be displayed once). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

(Means A5) In any one of the means A2 to the means A4, the change effect executing means is an effect effect executed by a mode that acts on the specific display displayed by the first mode (for example, FIG. 50 (5) or It is possible to execute a change effect including the action effects of the modes shown in FIGS. 50 (8), 51 (5), and 51 (8) (for example, the effect control microcomputer 100 selects the process selected in step S8010). By executing steps S8013 and S8105 according to the table, the action effect is executed in the pending notice effect) It is possible to execute the action effect a plurality of times with respect to the specific display displayed in the first aspect (1). In the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the second hold sequence is displayed. The effect production is executed at the timing of G, but the special hold does not change and the effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and it is possible to change from the special hold to the normal hold). Good. With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the effect of performing the change effect.

(Means A6) In any one of the means A2 to A5, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode, the display of the specific display displayed in the first mode The degree of advantage is higher than that in the case where the mode changes to the second mode (for example, as shown in FIG. 41, even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold, the red hold is finally displayed (a change pattern (change pattern 411, 414) is provided, and the change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined only in the case of a super-reach jackpot). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the specific display displayed in the third mode.

(Means A7) In any one of the means A2 to the means A6, a limiting means for limiting the number of specific displays displayed according to the third aspect (for example, in the effect control microcomputer 100 in the second embodiment). (S6005X, S6007X, S6009, S6010) may be configured to be provided. With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when executing the change effect.

(Means A8) In any one of the means A1 to A7, the specific display means includes at least a normal mode (for example, "white") and a first specific mode (for example, " Red ”) and a second specific mode (for example, a performance suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-relational suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode)) that suggests the effect content. A specific display can be displayed depending on the display mode (for example, in the third embodiment, steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714 in the effect control microcomputer 100 are displayed. (The part to be executed), the effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the content suggested by the specific display of the second specific mode (for example, In the third embodiment, by performing the same processing as steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table selected in the same processing as steps S8010 and S8011 in the effect control microcomputer 100, the special zone effect, the pseudo The specific display means displays the specific display according to the second specific mode, and then the performance of the content suggested by the specific display according to the second specific mode is executed. At this time (for example, 5 seconds after the production of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific display can be changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode (for example, in the third embodiment. , The production control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4. By executing step 14, when any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern, the hold display or the active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode which is the second display mode is It can be changed to “red” which is one specific mode). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific aspect.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of a game control board (main board). It is the block diagram which shows the circuit constitution example of the production control baseplate, the lamp driver baseplate and the audio output baseplate. It is a flow chart which shows the main processing which CPU in a main board performs. It is a flow chart which shows 4ms timer interruption processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows the fluctuation pattern of the production design which is prepared beforehand. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing a big hit judgment table, a small hit judgment table, and a big hit type judgment table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for big hits. It is explanatory drawing which shows the variation pattern classification determination table for deviations. It is explanatory drawing which shows a hit variation pattern determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a deviation variation pattern determination table. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the contents of production control command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the symbol designation command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the content of the variation category command. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows starting opening switch passage processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a storage buffer. It is the flowchart which shows the production processing when winning a prize. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows special design normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern setting processing. 7 is a flowchart showing a display result designation command transmission process. It is a flowchart showing a process during special symbol fluctuation. It is a flowchart showing a special symbol stop process. It is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process. It is a flow chart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is the flowchart which shows the production control main processing which the production control CPU executes. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows command analysis processing. It is the flowchart which shows production control process treatment. It is a flow chart which shows reservation notice production setting processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a final display mode determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a change pattern determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of a change pattern determination table. It is a flow chart which shows change pattern command reception waiting processing. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation start processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the stop design of production design. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of an effect production determination table. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of process data. It is the flowchart which shows the production design fluctuation process. It is the flowchart which shows production design fluctuation stop processing. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production aspect of reservation announcement production. It is the explanation drawing which shows one example of the production aspect of reservation announcement production. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production mode of the pending notice production in the modification 1. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of the production mode of the pending notice production in the modification 2. It is a flow chart which shows reservation notice production setting processing in a 2nd embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the final display mode determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the change pattern determination table in 2nd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display control process in 3rd Embodiment. It is a flowchart which shows the hold display control process in 3rd Embodiment. (A) is an explanatory view showing a reservation change pattern determination table, and (B) is an explanatory view showing a selection ratio of red suspension. It is explanatory drawing which shows a change timing determination lottery table. (A) is an explanatory view showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table, (B) is an explanatory view showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table, and (C) is an explanatory view showing a pseudo continuous suggestion execution lottery table. And (D) is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. It is the flowchart which shows the production design fluctuation process in 3rd execution form. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a hold display by the 2nd special suggestion aspect in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display in the case of displaying a hold display by the 2nd special suggestion aspect in 3rd Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the hold display and active display in each production mode which a player can select. It is the explanation drawing which shows the concrete example of the execution ratio of reservation announcement production in each production mode. It is the time chart which shows the concrete example of the production which is executed in each production mode. It is an explanatory view showing a specific example of an effect that can be executed only in the lightning mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production | presentation which can be performed in fine mode. It is an explanatory view showing a concrete example of an effect executable in the rain mode. It is explanatory drawing which shows the specific example of the production which can be performed in the lightning mode.

Embodiment 1.
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1, which is an example of a gaming machine, will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine 1 as viewed from the front.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 is composed of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and a game frame that is openably and closably attached to the inside of the outer frame. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a frame-shaped glass door frame 2 that is provided in the game frame so as to be openable and closable. The game frame includes a front frame (not shown) that is openably and closably installed with respect to the outer frame, a mechanism plate (not shown) to which mechanical components and the like are attached, and various components attached to them (games to be described later). (Excluding the board 6).

  On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hit ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. Below the hitting ball supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball receiving tray 4 for storing game balls that cannot be stored in the hitting ball supply tray 3 and a hitting ball operation handle (operation knob) 5 for firing the hit ball. A game board 6 is detachably attached to the back surface of the glass door frame 2. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-shaped body that constitutes the game board 6 and various parts attached to the plate-shaped body. Further, on the front surface of the game board 6, a game area 7 in which the driven game balls can flow down is formed.

  The member forming the surplus ball receiving tray (lower tray) 4 is formed in a stick shape (bar shape) at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper surface of the lower tray body (for example, the central portion of the lower tray), for example, and Is attached to the stick controller 122 that can be tilted in a plurality of directions (front, rear, left and right). It should be noted that the stick controller 122 has a predetermined operating finger (for example, an index finger) that is pushed and pulled by a player while the player holds the operating rod of the stick controller 122 with an operating hand (for example, left hand). A trigger button 121 (see FIG. 3) capable of instructing operation is provided, and a trigger sensor 125 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a predetermined instructing operation such as push-pull operation on the trigger button 121 is provided inside the operating rod of the stick controller 122. 3) is built in. Further, a tilt direction sensor unit 123 (see FIG. 3) for detecting a tilting operation with respect to the operating rod is provided inside the main body of the lower plate below the stick controller 122. Further, the stick controller 122 has a built-in vibrator motor 126 (see FIG. 3) for vibrating the stick controller 122.

  The member forming the hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3 is, for example, at a predetermined position on the front side of the upper plate body (for example, above the stick controller 122) or the like, and the player performs a predetermined instruction operation by pressing or the like. A possible push button 120 is provided. The push button 120 may be configured to be capable of mechanically, electrically, or electromagnetically detecting a predetermined instruction operation, such as a pressing operation by the player. A push sensor 124 (see FIG. 3) for detecting an operation action of the player performed on the push button 120 may be provided inside the main body of the upper plate at the installation position of the push button 120. In the configuration example shown in FIG. 1, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 have a vertical positional relationship in the central portion of the upper plate and the lower plate. On the other hand, the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may be attached to either the left or right side of the upper plate and the lower plate while maintaining the vertical positional relationship. Alternatively, the attachment positions of the push button 120 and the stick controller 122 may not have a vertical positional relationship, but may have a horizontal positional relationship, for example.

  Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 composed of a liquid crystal display device (LCD) is provided. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there is an effect symbol display area for performing variable display of effect symbols in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Therefore, the effect display device 9 corresponds to a variable display device that variably displays effect symbols. In the effect symbol display area, for example, there is a symbol display area that variably displays effect symbols for three decorations (for effect) of “left”, “middle”, and “right”. The symbol display area includes each of the “left”, “middle”, and “right” symbol display areas, but the position of the symbol display area does not have to be fixed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the symbol may be displayed. The three areas of the display area may be separated. The effect display device 9 is controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. When the variable display of the first special symbol is being executed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the effect control microcomputer causes the effect display device 9 to perform the effect display along with the variable display, and the second special symbol is displayed. When the variable display of the second special symbol is being executed on the symbol display device 8b, since the effect display is executed on the effect display device 9 along with the variable display, it is possible to easily grasp the progress status of the game. .

  Further, in the effect display device 9, the symbols other than the symbol which is the final stop symbol (for example, the middle symbol in the left and right middle symbols) continue for a predetermined time, and the jackpot symbols (for example, the symbols in the left, middle, and right are arranged in the same symbol). In the state of matching with the combination of symbols), the state of being stopped, swinging, scaling or deforming, or a plurality of symbols fluctuating in sync with the same symbol, or the positions of the display symbols are swapped. Then, the production performed in a state where the possibility of a big hit continues before the final result is displayed (hereinafter, these states are referred to as reach states) is referred to as reach production. Further, the reach state and the state thereof are referred to as the reach mode. Furthermore, the variable display including the reach effect is called the reach variable display. Then, when the display result of the symbols variably displayed on the effect display device 9 is not the big hit symbol, the result is “out”, and the variable display state ends. A player plays a game while enjoying how to generate a big hit.

  In the upper right portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are provided fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d for displaying a fourth symbol next to the effect symbol and a special symbol and a normal symbol described later. In this embodiment, the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the first special symbol to be described later, and the second A fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol is provided in which the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol.

  The fourth symbol for the first special symbol and the fourth symbol for the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol, and the fourth symbol display area 9c and the second special symbol for the first special symbol. The fourth symbol display area 9d for symbols may be collectively referred to as the fourth symbol display area.

  The variation (variable display) of the fourth symbol is realized by continuing the state in which the fourth symbol display regions 9c and 9d are repeatedly turned on and off at predetermined time intervals with a predetermined display color (for example, blue). . The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the first special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9c for the first special symbol are synchronized. The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the fourth symbol for the second special symbol in the fourth symbol display area 9d for the second special symbol are synchronized. The synchronization means that the variable display start time and the variable display time are the same and the variable display period is the same.

  On the right side of the effect display device 9, a first special symbol display device (first variable display portion) 8a that variably displays the first special symbol as identification information is provided. In this embodiment, the first special symbol display device 8a is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9. That is, the first special symbol display device 8a is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0-9. Further, on the right side of the effect display device 9 (on the right side of the first special symbol display device 8a), a second special symbol display device (second variable display portion) 8b that variably displays the second special symbol as identification information. Is also provided. The second special symbol display device 8b is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9. That is, the second special symbol display device 8b is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) from 0 to 9.

  The small display is formed in, for example, a rectangular shape. Further, in this embodiment, the type of the first special symbol and the type of the second special symbol are the same (for example, both numbers 0 to 9), but the types may be different. In addition, the first special symbol display device 8a and the second special symbol display device 8b may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, respectively.

  Hereinafter, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol, and the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b are collectively referred to as a special symbol indicator (variable display section). I have something to do.

  In addition, in this embodiment, although the case where two special symbol display devices 8a and 8b are provided is shown, the gaming machine may be provided with only one special symbol display device.

  The variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the first starting condition or the second starting condition that is the execution condition of the variable display is satisfied (for example, the game ball is the first starting winning opening 13 or the second starting winning opening). After passing 14 (including winning), the variable display start condition (for example, when the number of pending storage is not 0, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is not executed It is a state, and started based on the fact that the jackpot game is not executed) is established, and when the variable display time (variation time) elapses, the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. It should be noted that passing the game ball means that the game ball has passed through a predetermined winning area such as a winning opening and a gate, and includes a concept that the gaming ball has entered (winning) the winning opening. Is. Derivative display of the display result means that the symbol (an example of identification information) is finally stopped and displayed.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first starting winning opening 13 is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the first starting opening switch 13a.

  Further, below the winning device having the first starting winning opening (first starting opening) 13, there is provided a variable winning ball device 15 having a second starting winning opening 14 in which game balls can be won. The game ball that has won the second start winning opening (second starting opening) 14 is guided to the back surface of the game board 6 and detected by the second starting opening switch 14a. The variable winning ball device 15 is opened by the solenoid 16. When the variable winning ball device 15 is opened, the game balls can be won in the second starting winning port 14 (it is easy to start winning), which is advantageous for the player. When the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the game balls are easier to win in the second starting winning opening 14 than in the first starting winning opening 13. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, the gaming ball does not win the second starting winning port 14. Therefore, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, it is easier to win the game ball in the first starting winning opening 13 than in the second starting winning opening 14. In addition, in the state where the variable winning ball device 15 is in the closed state, although it is difficult to win the prize, it may be possible to win the prize (that is, the game ball is hard to win).

  Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

  When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state, the game ball heading for the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely easy to win in the second start winning port 14. The first start winning opening 13 is provided directly below the effect display device 9, but the gap between the lower end of the effect display device 9 and the first starting winning opening 13 is further narrowed, or the first start winning opening 13 is provided. The nails are densely arranged around 13 or the nail arrangement around the first starting winning opening 13 is made difficult to guide the game ball to the first starting winning opening 13, and the winning rate of the second starting winning opening 14 is increased. Alternatively, the winning rate of the first starting winning opening 13 may be set higher.

  Above the second special symbol display 8b, the second special symbol reservation memory display 18b consisting of four display units for displaying the number of effective winning balls that have entered the second starting winning opening 14, that is, the second reservation memory number. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of indicators to be turned on by 1 each time there is an effective start winning. Then, each time the variable display on the second special symbol display device 8b is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  Further, above the second special symbol hold storage display 18b, the number of valid winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first holding storage number (holding storage is also referred to as starting memory or starting winning storage. ) Is provided with a first special symbol reservation storage display 18a consisting of four displays. The 1st special symbol reservation storage indicator 18a increases the number of the indicator which lights up whenever there is an effective starting winning a prize. Then, each time the variable display on the first special symbol display device 8a is started, the number of lighted display devices is reduced by one.

  Moreover, the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with a first holding storage display unit 9a for displaying the first holding storage number and a second holding storage display unit 9b for displaying the second holding storage number. . Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, instead of the first pending storage display unit 9a and the second pending storage display unit 9b, the total of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. It is also possible to provide an area (total reserved storage display section) for displaying the total number (total reserved storage number).

  The effect display device 9 is for decoration (for effect) during the variable display time of the first special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display time of the second special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b. Variable display of the effect design as the design of. The variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display device 8a and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol on the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the effect symbol on the effect display device 9 are synchronized. Further, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, and when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the second special symbol display device 8b, a production symbol that reminds the big hit on the effect display device 9 The combination of is displayed stopped.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, below the variable winning ball apparatus 15, a special variable winning ball apparatus 20 forming a special winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 includes an opening / closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display device 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display device 8b. In the specific game state (big hit game state) that occurs when is displayed and displayed, the open / close plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, so that the special winning opening, which is the winning area, is in the open state. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the count switch 23.

  On the left side of the effect display device 9, a normal symbol display device 10 that variably displays normal symbols is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display device 10 is realized by a simple and small-sized display device (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying numbers 0-9. That is, the normal symbol display device 10 is configured to variably display numbers (or symbols) of 0 to 9. Further, the small-sized display is formed, for example, in a rectangular shape. In addition, the normal symbol display device 10 may be configured to variably display numbers (or two-digit symbols) of 00 to 99, for example. In addition, the normal symbol display device 10 is not limited to a 7-segment LED, for example, a display device that can display a predetermined symbol display (for example, a decorative lamp that can alternately display "○" and "x"). It may be composed of.

  When the game ball passes through the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variable display of the display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started. And when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display device 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol. For example, symbol "7".), The variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. That is, the state of the variable winning ball device 15 is an advantageous state from a disadvantageous state to the player when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol (a state in which the game ball can be won in the second starting winning port 14). Changes to. In the vicinity of the normal symbol display device 10, a normal symbol hold storage display device 41 having a display unit of four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32 is provided. Every time there is a passage of the game ball to the gate 32, that is, every time the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 increases the number of LEDs to be turned on by one. Then, each time the variable display of the normal symbol display device 10 is started, the number of LEDs to be turned on is reduced by 1. Furthermore, compared to the normal state, the probability of being decided to be a big jackpot is a high probability state (compared to the normal state, a state in which the probability of being judged as a big jackpot as a variable display result of a special symbol is increased) Then, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 are increased. In addition, the open time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 can be increased even in a time-saving state (a game state in which the variable display time of the special symbol is shortened) in which the variable time of the symbol is shortened although it is not in the probability changing state.

  At the lower part of the game board 6, there is an out port 26 into which hit balls that have not been won are taken. Further, four speakers 27 for producing a sound effect or a voice as a predetermined voice output are provided on the upper left and right sides and the lower left and right sides outside the game area 7. A frame LED 28 provided on the front frame is provided on the outer periphery of the game area 7.

  The game machine drives a drive motor in response to the player operating the ball operation handle 5, and uses a rotational force of the drive motor to shoot a game ball into the game area 7 (not shown). ) Is provided. The game ball shot from the hitting ball launching device enters the game area 7 through a ball hitting rail formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descends from the game area 7. When the game ball enters the first starting winning opening 13 and is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, if the variable display of the first special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, That 1 start condition is established), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started on the first special symbol display 8a, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the first special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the first starting winning opening 13. Unless the variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the first reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the first reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

  When the game ball enters the second starting winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, if the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the variable display of the special symbol ends, 2 start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started on the second special symbol display 8b, and the variable display of the effect symbol is started on the effect display device 9. That is, the variable display of the second special symbol and the effect symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning port 14. If it is not a state where the variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the second reserved storage number is increased by 1 on condition that the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value.

In this embodiment, in the case of a probability variation big hit, the game state shifts to a high-probability state (probability variation state), and the game balls easily start winning (that is, special symbol display devices 8a, 8b and effects). A transition is made to a high base state, which is a gaming state controlled so that the execution condition of the variable display on the display device 9 is easily established (in this embodiment, a transition is made to a time saving state).
Also, when the gaming state is shifted to the time saving state, it is shifted to the high base state. In the high base state, for example, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being in the open state is increased or the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state is extended, as compared with the case in which the high base state is not set. It will be easier to win the starting prize.

  In addition, it does not extend the time when the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state (also referred to as an open extension state), but shifts to a normal symbol probability changing state in which the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display device 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased. Therefore, the high base state may be set. When the stop symbol in the normal symbol display device 10 becomes a predetermined symbol (hit symbol), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for a predetermined number of times and for a predetermined time. In this case, by controlling the transition to the normal symbol probability changing state, the probability that the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 becomes a winning symbol is increased, and the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 being in the open state is increased. Therefore, if the state shifts to the normal symbol probability changing state, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 are increased, and the starting winning prize is easily achieved (high base state). That is, the opening time and the number of times of opening the variable winning ball device 15 are increased when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a winning symbol or the stop symbol of the special symbol is a probability variation symbol, and the like, and from a disadvantageous state for the player. It changes to an advantageous state (a state in which it is easy to start winning). In addition, increasing the number of times of opening is a concept including changing from a closed state to an open state.

  Further, by shifting to the normal symbol time-shortened state in which the variation time (variable display period) of the normal symbol on the normal symbol display 10 is shortened, the high base state may be shifted. In the normal symbol time saving state, since the variation time of the normal symbol is shortened, the frequency of the variation of the normal symbol is increased, and as a result, the frequency of winning the normal symbol is increased. Therefore, since the frequency of winning the normal symbol is high, the frequency of the variable winning ball device 15 is high, and the starting winning is easy (high base state).

  Also, by shifting to a time saving state in which the variation time (variable display period) of special symbols and effect symbols is shortened, the variation time of special symbols and effect symbols is reduced, so the variation of special symbols and effect symbols starts. It is possible to reduce a situation in which the frequency of winning is increased (in other words, the storage of the reserved memory is quickly exhausted), and an invalid starting winning is caused. Therefore, an effective starting winning is likely to occur, and as a result, the possibility of playing a big hit game is increased.

  Furthermore, by shifting to all the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (transfer to high base state) May be. In addition, by shifting to any one of the states shown above (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it becomes easier to start winning (high base State). In addition, by shifting to only one of the above-mentioned states (open extension state, normal symbol probability changing state, normal symbol time saving state and special symbol time saving state), it is easy to start winning. It is also possible to set).

  FIG. 2 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. Note that FIG. 2 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. On the main board 31, a game control microcomputer (corresponding to a game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program is mounted. The game control microcomputer 560 includes a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progress control), a RAM 55 as a storage unit used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing a control operation according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57. including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are built in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The 1-chip microcomputer only needs to include at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Further, the I / O port section 57 may be externally attached. The game control microcomputer 560 further includes a random number circuit 503 that generates a hardware random number (random number generated by a hardware circuit).

  Further, the RAM 55 is a backup RAM as a non-volatile storage means, a part or all of which is backed up by a backup power supply created on a power supply board. That is, even if the power supply to the gaming machine is stopped, a part or all of the content of the RAM 55 is saved for a predetermined backup period (until the capacitor as the backup power supply is discharged and the backup power supply cannot be supplied). It In particular, at least data corresponding to the game state, that is, the control state of the game control means (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, etc.) and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are stored in the backup RAM. The data according to the control state of the game control means is data necessary for recovering the control state before the occurrence of a power failure or the like based on the data when the power is restored after a power failure or the like. Further, data according to the control state and data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls are defined as data indicating the progress state of the game. In this embodiment, it is assumed that the entire RAM 55 is backed up by power supply.

  Since the CPU 56 in the game control microcomputer 560 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, hereinafter, the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing). Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. This also applies to the microcomputers mounted on other substrates than the main substrate 31.

  The random number circuit 503 is a hardware circuit used to generate a random number for determination to determine whether or not to make a big hit based on the display result of the variable display of the special symbol. The random number circuit 503 updates the numerical data according to the set update rule within the numerical range in which the initial value (for example, 0) and the upper limit value (for example, 65535) are set, and the start occurs at random timing. Based on that the time of winning is the time of reading (extracting) the numerical data, the numerical data read has a random number generating function.

  Further, an input driver circuit 58 for giving a detection signal from the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a and the count switch 23 to the game controlling microcomputer 560 is also mounted on the main board 31. Further, the output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 16 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20 forming the special winning opening in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 is also a main board. It is mounted on 31.

  In addition, the game control microcomputer 560, the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, which displays the special symbol variably, the normal symbol display 10 which variably displays the normal symbol, the first special symbol reservation storage Display control of the display 18a, the second special symbol reservation storage display 18b and the normal symbol reservation storage display 41 is performed.

  An information output circuit 64 that outputs an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit game state to an external device such as a hall computer is also mounted on the main board 31.

  In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 instructs the effect contents from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The effect control command is received, and display control of the effect display device 9 that variably displays effect symbols is performed.

  Further, the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80 controls the display of the frame LED 28 provided on the frame side via the lamp driver board 35, and the speaker 27 via the audio output board 70. Control the sound output of.

  The effect control means is also connected to a trigger sensor 125 and a tilt direction sensor unit 123 included in the stick controller 122, a vibrator motor 126, and a push sensor 124 included in the push button 120, as described later. (See FIG. 3), but the illustration is omitted in FIG.

  FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing a circuit configuration example of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the lamp driver board 35 and the sound output board 70 are not equipped with a microcomputer, but may be equipped with a microcomputer. Further, without providing the lamp driver board 35 and the sound output board 70, only the effect control board 80 may be provided for effect control.

  The effect control board 80 is equipped with an effect control CPU 101 and an effect control microcomputer 100 including a RAM for storing information on effects such as effect symbol process flags. The RAM may be external. In this embodiment, the RAM in the effect control microcomputer 100 is not backed up by power supply. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 101 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown), and receives a signal from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( In response to the effect control INT signal), the effect control command is received via the input driver 102 and the input port 103. Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the VDP (video display processor) 109 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

  In this embodiment, a VDP 109 that cooperates with the effect control microcomputer 100 to control the display of the effect display device 9 is mounted on the effect control board 80. The VDP 109 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 100, and maps the VRAM therein. VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data. Then, the VDP 109 outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9 via the frame memory.

  The effect control CPU 101 outputs, to the VDP 109, a command for reading necessary data from a CGROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The CGROM stores in advance character image data and moving image data displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, people, characters, figures and symbols (including effect patterns), and background image data. ROM for this. The VDP 109 reads the image data from the CGROM according to a command from the effect control CPU 101. Then, the VDP 109 executes display control based on the read image data.

  The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 102 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 102 passes the signal input from the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). Signal direction It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

  As signal direction restricting means for allowing the signal input from the main board 31 to pass through the relay board 77 only in the direction toward the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal in the direction from the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77). The unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. As the unidirectional circuit, for example, a diode or a transistor is used. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Further, the unidirectional circuit is provided for each signal. Further, since the production control command and the production control INT signal are output from the main board 31 via the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 to the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (on the side of the game control microcomputer 560). The output port 571 is a part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. Further, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (on the side of the relay board 77).

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player has operated the trigger button 121 of the stick controller 122, from the trigger sensor 125 via the input port 106. Further, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player's operation on the push button 120 has been detected, from the push sensor 124 via the input port 106. In addition, the effect control CPU 101 inputs an operation detection signal, which is an information signal indicating that the player's operation of the stick controller 122 has been detected, from the tilt direction sensor unit 123 via the input port 106. . Further, the effect control CPU 101 causes the stick controller 122 to vibrate by outputting a drive signal to the vibrator motor 126 via the output port 105.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs a signal for driving the LED to the lamp driver board 35 via the output port 105. Further, the effect control CPU 101 outputs the sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the output port 104.

  In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the LED is input to the LED driver 352 via the input driver 351. The LED driver 352 supplies a current to a light emitting body such as the frame LED 28 based on a signal for driving the LED.

  In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input driver 702. The voice synthesizing IC 703 generates a voice or a sound effect corresponding to the sound number data and outputs it to the amplifier circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 a voice signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level corresponding to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data according to the tone number data. The control data according to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating the output mode of the sound effect or the sound in a predetermined effect period (for example, the effect period of the effect symbol) in time series.

  Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 4 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main board 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and power supply is started, the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, and the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether the contents of the program are valid, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main process, the CPU 56 first makes necessary initial settings.

  In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets the interrupt prohibition (step S1). Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designated address is set to the stack pointer (step S3). After initialization of the built-in device (initialization of CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port) which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits)) (step S4), the RAM can be accessed. Is set (step S5). In the interrupt mode 2, the address synthesized from the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the CPU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output by the built-in device is This is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal (clear signal) of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply board) input through the input port (step S6). If ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes normal initialization processing (steps S10 to S15).

  If the clear switch is not on, check whether the backup RAM area data protection process (eg, power supply stop process such as addition of parity data) was performed when power supply to the gaming machine was stopped. Yes (step S7). When it is confirmed that such protection processing is not performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop process.

  After confirming that the power supply stop process has been performed, the CPU 56 checks the data in the backup RAM area (step S8). In this embodiment, a parity check is performed as a data check. Therefore, in step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. When the power is restored after an unexpected power failure such as a power failure, the data in the backup RAM area should have been saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data when the power supply was stopped. In such a case, since the internal state cannot be returned to the state when the power supply was stopped, the initialization process that is executed when the power is turned on is performed when the power supply is not restored.

  If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 is a game state restoration process (steps S41 to S43) for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state when the power supply is stopped. Processing). Specifically, the start address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set to the pointer (step S41), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set to the work area (area in the RAM 55) (step S42). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, the initialization data of the area that may be initialized in the work area is set. By the processing of steps S41 and S42, the saved contents of the work area that should not be initialized remain as they are. The part that should not be initialized is, for example, data indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped (special symbol process flag, probability variation flag, time saving flag, etc.), the area where the output state of the output port is saved (output port buffer ), A portion in which data indicating the number of unpaid prize balls is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 transmits a power failure recovery designation command as an initialization command at the time of power supply recovery (step S43). Further, the CPU 56 transmits a display result designation command designating a display result (normal big hit, probability big hit, sudden big hit, small hit, or off) to the effect control board 80 (step). S44). Then, the process proceeds to step S14. In step S44, the CPU 56 also transmits the first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command (see FIG. 13) when the value of the special symbol pointer described later is also stored in the backup RAM. You may do it. In this case, the production control microcomputer 100 may restart the variable display of the fourth symbol based on the reception of the first symbol variation designation command or the second symbol variation designation command.

  In this embodiment, the backup RAM area also stores the value of the variable time timer, which will be described later. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, after the display result designation command is transmitted in step S44, the measurement of the value of the variable time timer that has been saved is restarted and the variable display of the special symbol is restarted and saved. When the value of the variable time timer that has been used has timed out, a symbol confirmation designation command to be described later is transmitted. Further, in this embodiment, the value of a special symbol process flag described later is also stored in the backup RAM area. Therefore, when the power failure is restored, the special symbol process process is restarted from the process corresponding to the value of the special symbol process flag that is saved.

  It should be noted that the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the variable time timer stored in the backup RAM area is 0, instead of always transmitting the display result designation command when the power is restored. . Then, if the value of the variable time timer is not 0, it is determined that the power outage is occurring during the change, and the display result designation command is transmitted. It may be determined that the display state designation command is not transmitted and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  Further, the CPU 56 may first check whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag stored in the backup RAM area is 3. Then, if the value of the special symbol process flag is 3, it is determined that there is a power outage during fluctuation, and the display result designation command is transmitted. If the special symbol process flag is not 3, it fluctuates during a power failure. It may be determined that the display result designation command is not transmitted and the display result designation command may not be transmitted.

  In this embodiment, both the backup flag and the check data are used to confirm whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored, but only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the game state restoration process.

  In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10). By the RAM clearing process, predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the random number for normal symbol determination) is initialized to 0, but an arbitrary value or a predetermined value It may be initialized to. Further, the predetermined data (for example, the data of the count value of the counter for generating the normal symbol per determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Further, the start address of the initialization setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set to the pointer (step S11), and the contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set to the work area (step S12).

  By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a normal symbol per determination random number counter, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, etc. Initially set to a flag for selectively performing processing according to the control state. The value is set.

  Further, the CPU 56 initializes a sub board (a board on which a microcomputer other than the main board 31 is mounted) for initialization (a command indicating that the game control microcomputer 560 has executed the initialization process). Is also transmitted to the sub-board (step S13). For example, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the initialization designation command, the effect display device 9 performs a screen display for notifying that the control of the gaming machine has been initialized, that is, initialization notification.

  Further, the CPU 56 executes a random number circuit setting process for initializing the random number circuit 503 (step S14). The CPU 56, for example, executes a process in accordance with a random number circuit setting program to set the random number circuit 503 to update the value of the random R.

  Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is taken periodically at predetermined time intervals (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to, for example, 4 ms is set in a predetermined register (time constant register) as an initial value. In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is taken every 4 ms.

  When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 repeatedly executes the display random number updating process (step S17) and the initial value random number updating process (step S18) in the main process. When the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are executed, the interrupt prohibited state is set (step S16), and when the display random number update process and the initial value random number update process are completed, the interrupt permitted state is set. It is set (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the stop symbol of the special symbol when the big hit is not made, or a random number for determining whether or not the reach is made when the big hit is not made. The random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number. The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random numbers. In this embodiment, the random number for the initial value is the initial value of the count value of the counter for generating a random number for deciding whether or not to hit the normal symbol (ordinary symbol per determination random number generation counter). It is a random number for determining. A game control process for controlling the progress of a game to be described later (the game control microcomputer 560 controls a game device such as an effect display device, a variable winning ball device, and a ball payout device, which is provided in the game device, by itself. In the process to transmit, or the process of transmitting a command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as gaming device control process), the count value of the random number per ordinary symbol is one round (ordinary random number for per symbol determination) When the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of the possible values has been increased), the initial value is set to the counter.

  When the timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, a power-off detection process is executed to detect whether a power-off signal has been output (whether or not it has been turned on) (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the power supply monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply board detects a decrease in the voltage of the power supply supplied to the gaming machine. Then, in the power-off detection process, when the CPU 56 detects that the power-off signal has been output, the CPU 56 executes the power-supply-stop-time process for saving necessary data in the backup RAM area. Next, the detection signals of the gate switch 32a, the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a, and the count switch 23 are input via the input driver circuit 58, and their state is determined (switch processing: step S21). ).

  Next, the CPU 56 is a first special symbol display device 8a, a second special symbol display device 8b, a normal symbol display device 10, a first special symbol reserved memory display device 18a, a second special symbol reserved memory display device 18b, a normal symbol. A display control process for controlling the display of the pending storage display 41 is executed (step S22). Regarding the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the normal symbol display device 10, a drive signal is output to each display device according to the contents of the output buffer set in steps S32 and S33. Execute control.

  In addition, a process of updating the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a normal symbol per determination random number used for game control is performed (determination random number update process: step S23). The CPU 56 further performs a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number and the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: steps S24 and S25).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol process process (step S26). In the special symbol process processing, the first special symbol display device 8a, the second special symbol display device 8b and the special symbol process flag for controlling the special winning opening in a predetermined order are subjected to corresponding processing. The CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Then, a normal symbol process process is performed (step S27). In the normal symbol process process, the CPU 56 executes a corresponding process according to the normal symbol process flag for controlling the display state of the normal symbol display device 10 in a predetermined order. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag according to the gaming state.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a process of sending a production control command to the production control microcomputer 100 (production control command control process: step S28).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process for outputting data such as big hit information, start information, and probability variation information supplied to the hall management computer (step S29).

  Further, the CPU 56 executes prize ball processing such as setting the number of prize balls based on the detection signals of the first starting port switch 13a, the second starting port switch 14a and the count switch 23 (step S30). Specifically, a payout control micro mounted on the payout control board 37 in response to a winning detection based on that any of the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, and the count switch 23 is turned on. A payout control command (award ball number signal) indicating the number of award balls is output to the computer. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball payout device 97 in response to a payout control command indicating the number of prize balls.

  In this embodiment, the RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 relates to ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area corresponding to the output state of the output port. The content is output to the output port (step S31: output process).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a special symbol display control process for setting the special symbol display control data for performing the special symbol effect display according to the value of the special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data ( Step S32).

  Further, the CPU 56 performs a normal symbol display control process for setting a normal symbol display control data for performing a normal symbol effect display according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in an output buffer for setting a normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). CPU56, for example, until the end flag is set when the start flag for the fluctuation of the normal symbol is set, the fluctuation speed of the normal symbol switches the display state ("○" and "x") every 0.2 seconds. At such a speed, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer (for example, 1 indicating “◯” and 0 indicating “x”) is switched every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in step S22 in accordance with the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby executing the effect display of the ordinary symbol on the ordinary symbol display device 10.

  After that, the interrupt permission state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

  By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be executed in.

  FIG. 6 is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern of the effect symbol prepared in advance. As shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as the variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “non-reach”, non-reach PA1-1 to non-reach A variation pattern of reach PA1-2 is prepared. Among them, the non-reach PA1-1 is a variation pattern that does not involve reach and does not involve pseudo-repeating or sliding effects, and is a variation pattern for normal variation that is not a shortening variation (in this example, variation time 12.50 seconds). Is. In addition, the non-reach PA1-2 is a variation pattern that does not involve reach and that does not involve pseudo-repeating or sliding effects, and is a variation pattern for shortening variation (in this example, variation time 2 0.00 seconds).

  Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 6, when non-reach is lost, a case where a variation pattern accompanied by pseudo-relation or sliding effect is not included is shown. However, when non-reach is lost, May be configured so as to provide a variation pattern accompanied by a pseudo string or a sliding effect.

  In addition, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result is “out” and the variable display mode of the effect design is “reach”, normal PA2-1 to normal PA2-2, normal PB2-1 to normal PB2-2 , Super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 and super PB3-1 to super PB3-2 are prepared. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-1 is used among the variation patterns used for reach and accompanied by the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed once. Also, in the case of using the normal PB2-2 among the fluctuation patterns used when reaching and with the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-changing is performed twice. Furthermore, of the fluctuation patterns used for reach and involving the effect of pseudo rendition, when super PA3-1 to super PA3-2 are used, re-changing is performed three times. It should be noted that the re-variation means that the variable display of the effect symbol is temporarily executed after the variable effect display of the effect symbol is started until the display result is derived and displayed, and then the variable display of the effect symbol is executed again. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 6, in this embodiment, as a variation pattern corresponding to the case where the variable display result of the special symbol becomes the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol, normal PA2-3 to normal PA2-4, normal PB2 -3 to normal PB2-4, super PA3-3 to super PA3-4, super PB3-3 to super PB3-4, special PG1-1 to special PG1-3, special PG2-1 to special PG2-2 Is prepared. Note that, in FIG. 6, the variation patterns of the special PG1-1 to the special PG1-3 and the special PG2-1 to the special PG2-2 are variation patterns used in the case of sudden probability big hit or small hit. In addition, as shown in FIG. 6, when the normal PB2-3 is used among the variation patterns that are used when there is no sudden probability big hit or small hit and accompany a pseudo-representation, the re-variation is performed once. Further, in the case of using the normal PB2-4 among the variation patterns used when reaching and with the effect of pseudo-relation, the re-variation is performed twice. Further, among the variation patterns used when reaching and with the effect of pseudo-relation, when the super PA3-3 to super PA3-4 are used, the revariation is performed three times. Further, the variation pattern of the special PG1-3 used in the case of the sudden variation big hit or the small hit and accompanied by the effect of the pseudo-repeating is re-varied once.

FIG. 7 is an explanatory diagram showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1 (MR1): Determines the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, probability variation big hit, sudden probability variation big hit described later) (for jackpot type determination)
(2) Random 2 (MR2): Determines the type (type) of variation pattern (for determination of variation pattern type)
(3) Random 3 (MR3): Determine a variation pattern (variation time) (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 4 (MR4): Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on a normal symbol (for normal symbol hit determination)
(5) Random 5 (MR5): Determine the initial value of random 4 (for determining random 4 initial value)

  In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 5, the game control microcomputer 560 is a counter for generating the random number for jackpot type determination of (1) and the random number for determination of normal symbol per item of (4). Count up (add 1). That is, they are the determination random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random numbers (random 2, random 3) or the initial value random numbers (random 5). Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers may be used to enhance the game effect. Further, in this embodiment, as the big hit determination random number, a random number generated by hardware built in the game control microcomputer 560 (which may be hardware outside the game control microcomputer 560) is used. As the big hit determination random number, a software random number may be used instead of a hardware random number.

  FIG. 8A is an explanatory diagram showing a jackpot determination table. The big hit judgment table is a set of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which big hit judgment values to be compared with the random R are set. The big hit judgment table includes a normal big hit judgment table used in a normal state and a time-shortening state (that is, a gaming state that is not the positive change state), and a probability variation big hit determination table used in the probability variation state. In the normal-time jackpot determination table, the numerical values described in the left column of FIG. 8 (A) are set, and in the probability variation jackpot determination table, the numerical values described in the right column of FIG. 8 (A). Is set. The numerical value described in FIG. 8A is a jackpot determination value.

  8B and 8C are explanatory diagrams showing the small hit determination table. The small hitting determination table is a collection of data stored in the ROM 54, and is a table in which a small hitting determination value to be compared with the random R is set. The small hit determination table, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) used when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, and the small hit determination table used when performing the variable display of the second special symbol There is (for the second special symbol). The small hitting determination table (for the first special symbol) is set to each numerical value described in FIG. 8 (B), and the small hitting determination table (for the second special symbol) is shown in FIG. 8 (C). Each listed numerical value is set. In addition, the numerical values described in FIGS. 8B and 8C are the small hit determination values.

  The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and uses the extracted value as the value of the big hit judging random number (random R). The big hit judging random number value is shown in FIG. 8 (A). If any of the jackpot determination values match, it is decided to make a jackpot (a normal jackpot, a probability variation jackpot, or a sudden probability variation jackpot, which will be described later) for the special symbol. Further, when the big hit determination random number value matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, it is determined to make a small hit for the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 8A indicates the probability (ratio) of being a big hit. The "probability" shown in FIGS. 8 (B) and 8 (C) indicates the probability (ratio) of a small hit. Also, to determine whether to make a big hit, to determine whether to transition to the big hit gaming state, the stop symbol in the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b It also means deciding whether or not to make a jackpot design. Also, to determine whether to make a small hit, it is to determine whether to move to the small hit game state, stop in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make the symbol a small hit symbol.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, when the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) is used, the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/300. On the other hand, when the small hit determination table (second special symbol) is used, the case where the small hit is determined at a rate of 1/3000 will be described. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 13 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning a prize is given to the second starting winning opening 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared to the case where the variable display is executed, the proportion of the “small hit” is determined to be high.

  8D and 8E are explanatory diagrams showing the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b stored in the ROM 54. Of these, FIG. 8 (D) determines the jackpot type by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 (that is, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the first special symbol) 131a in the case. In addition, FIG. 8 (E) is a case where the jackpot type is determined by using the pending storage based on the fact that the game ball has won the second starting winning opening 14 (that is, when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed). It is a jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) 131b.

  The jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", based on the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine one of the "probability variation jackpot" and "a sudden variation jackpot." In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the jackpot type determination table 131a is assigned with five determination values for "abrupt probability variation jackpot" (40 minutes). 5 is determined to be a sudden probability big hit), the jackpot type determination table 131b is assigned one determination value for "a sudden probability big jackpot" (a ratio of 1 in 40). Suddenly decided as a sudden change jackpot in)) Explain the case. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the start winning a prize is given to the first starting winning opening 13 and the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the starting winning is given to the second starting winning opening 14 and the second special symbol is displayed. Compared with the case where the variable display is executed, the rate of being determined as “a sudden probability big hit” is high. In addition, "sudden probability big hit" is distributed only to the big hit type determination table 131a for the first special symbol, and "sudden probability big hit" is not distributed to the big jack type determination table 131b for the second special symbol (that is, , The "special sudden change big hit" may be determined only when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed).

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, the types of big hits include “normal big hit”, “probably odd big hit” and “suddenly sudden big hit”. In this embodiment, the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is two types, 15 rounds and 2 rounds, but the number of rounds executed in the big hit game is shown in this embodiment. It's not limited to For example, a 10R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a 10-round jackpot game, a 7R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a seven-round jackpot game, and a 5R certainty variation jackpot for controlling a five-round jackpot game may be provided. Further, in the present embodiment, there are three types of big hit types, namely, “normal big hit”, “probability change big hit” and “sudden probability change big hit”. A jackpot type may be provided. In addition, conversely, there may be less than three types of big hits, for example, only two types may be provided as big hit types.

  The "normal big hit" is a big hit that is controlled to a big hit game state of 15 rounds and is shifted to only a time saving state after the end of the big hit game state (see step S167 described later). After shifting to the time saving state, when the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment), the time saving state ends (see steps S168, S137 to S140). Even before the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times, the time saving state is finished even when the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  The "probable variation jackpot" is a jackpot that is controlled to a jackpot gaming state for 15 rounds and shifts to the probability variation state after the jackpot gaming state is completed (in this embodiment, the jackpot is also shifted to the probability variation state and also in the time saving state. (See steps S169 and S170 described later). Then, the probability variation state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  In addition, the "sudden probability big hit" is allowed up to a number of times when the special winning opening is less than the number of times of "normal big hit" or "probable big hit" (in this embodiment, the opening is 0.1 second twice). It is a big hit. That is, in the case of "a sudden sudden change big hit", it is controlled to a big hit game state of two rounds. In addition, in "normal big hit" and "probable odds big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round is as long as 29 seconds, whereas in "sudden positive big hit", the opening time of the big winning opening per round It is extremely short at 0.1 seconds, and it is hardly expected that a game ball will win the big winning opening during the big hit game. Then, in this embodiment, after the sudden probability big hit game state is suddenly shifted to the probability variation state (in this embodiment, the probability variation state is shifted to the time saving state. Step S169, which will be described later). See S170). Then, the probability variation state and the time saving state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S132).

  It should be noted that the mode of sudden probability big hit is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example, the number of times of opening the special winning opening may be set to 15 times (15 rounds), which is the same as in the case of a normal big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit, and only the opening time of the special winning opening may be set to 0.1 seconds, which is extremely short.

  In addition, in this embodiment, even when it is a "small hit", the special winning opening is opened twice for 0.1 seconds each, and the same control as the big hit game state by the "sudden probability big hit" is performed. Be seen. Then, in the case of "small hit", the game state does not change after the opening of the special winning opening twice, and the gaming state before the "small hit" is maintained. By doing so, it becomes impossible to recognize whether it is a "sudden variation big hit" or a "small hit", and the enjoyment of the game is improved. In addition, when it is configured such that all the types of big hits are the probability varying big hits, the small hits may not be provided. Also, when the big hit types are all probability variation big hits, if a small hit is provided, the probability variation only (high-probability state) is entered and a sudden probability variation big hit does not involve a time-saving state (high base state). It is preferable to provide (the opening pattern of the special winning opening is the same in the case of sudden variation big hit and small hit).

  In the jackpot type determination tables 131a and 131b, the determination values (the jackpot type determination values, which are numerical values to be compared with the value of Random 1 and correspond to each of the "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", and "sudden probability variation jackpot", respectively. ) Is set. When the value of Random 1 matches any of the jackpot type determination values, the CPU 56 determines the type of jackpot as the type corresponding to the matched jackpot type determination value.

  9 (A) to 9 (C) are explanatory diagrams showing the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C. The jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C, when it is determined that the variable display result is a jackpot pattern, the variation pattern type is a random number for variation pattern type determination according to the determination result of the jackpot type. It is a table that is referred to for determining any one of a plurality of types based on (Random 2).

  Each of the jackpot variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for variation pattern type determination, that is, normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2, The determination value corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of super CA3-3, special CA4-1, and special CA4-2 is set.

  For example, the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132A shown in FIG. 9A used when the jackpot type is “normal jackpot” and FIG. 9B used when the jackpot type is “probable variation jackpot”. The assignment of determination values to the variation pattern types of normal CA3-1 to normal CA3-2 and super CA3-3 is different from the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132B.

  In this way, when the big hit variation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C selected according to the big hit type are compared, the assignment of the determination value to each variation pattern type differs depending on the big hit type. In addition, a determination value is assigned to different variation pattern types depending on the jackpot type. Therefore, different variation pattern types can be determined according to the determination result of which of the plurality of types of big hit types, and the rate of determination of the same variation pattern type can be different.

  As shown in FIGS. 9 (A) and 9 (B), in this embodiment, in the case of “normal big hit” or “probability variation big hit”, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type It can be understood that the variable display involving at least the super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed when is 150 to 251.

  Also, regarding super-reach jackpot, variation pattern types with pseudo-relation (variation pattern types including variation patterns of super PA3-3 and super PA3-4) and variation pattern types without pseudo-relation (super PB3-3, super PB3-4 fluctuation pattern type including a fluctuation pattern). In this case, in both of the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132A for the normal big hit and the large hit variation pattern type determination table 132B for the probability-varying big hit, the variation pattern type accompanied by the super reach and the pseudo continuous and the super reach and the pseudo continuous are defined. A variation pattern type that is not accompanied by this is assigned.

  In addition, in the jackpot variation pattern type determination table 132C used when the jackpot type is “a sudden sudden variation jackpot”, for example, when the jackpot types such as the special CA4-1 and the special CA4-2 are other than the “sudden sudden variation jackpot”. Is assigned a determination value for a variation pattern type to which no determination value is assigned. Therefore, when the variable display result is "big hit" and the big hit type is "sudden probability big hit", it is different from the case of normal big hit or big hit state by probability big hit. It can be determined by the variation pattern type.

  In addition, FIG. 9D is an explanatory diagram showing a variation pattern type determination table for small hits 132D. The small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D includes a plurality of types of variation pattern types based on random numbers (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type when it is determined that the variable display result is a small hit pattern. Is a table that is referenced to determine any of the above. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 9 (D), when it is decided to make a small hit, special CA4-1 is decided as the variation pattern type. .

  10A to 10C are explanatory diagrams showing the variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for deviation. Of these, FIG. 10 (A) shows the out-of-range variation pattern type determination table 135A used when the game state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is less than three. Further, FIG. 10 (B) shows a variation pattern type determination table 135B for deviation which is used when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more. Further, FIG. 10C shows the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 135C used when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state. The variation pattern type determination tables 135A to 135C for deviation include a plurality of variation pattern types based on a random number (random 2) for determination of the variation pattern when it is determined that the variable display result is to be a variation pattern. Is a table that is referenced to determine any of the above.

  Each of the out-of-range variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B is a numerical value (determination value) that is compared with the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type, and the non-reach CA2-1 to non-reach CA2-. 2, a determination value corresponding to any of the variation pattern types of normal CA2-3 to normal CA2-4 and super CA2-5 is set.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 (A) and 10 (B), in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type It can be seen that, when the number is 230 to 251, the variable display with at least super reach (super reach A, super reach B) is executed regardless of the total number of pending storages.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B, in this embodiment, when the game state is off and the game state is the normal state, the value of the random number (random 2) for determining the variation pattern type Is 1 to 89, at least regardless of the total number of pending storages, the variable display of the normal fluctuation is executed without the reach (without the effects such as the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect) (non-reach CA2-1). Therefore, it can be seen that the variation pattern type is that of the non-reach normal variation of the non-reach PA1-1 as shown in FIG. With such a table configuration, in the present embodiment, the determination table (displacement variation pattern type determination tables 135A and 135B) includes at least variable display patterns other than the reach variable display pattern (variation pattern with reach). For some, regardless of the number of rights (first reserved memory number, second reserved memory number, total reserved memory number) stored in the reserved storage means (first reserved storage buffer or second reserved storage buffer), A common determination value (1 to 89 in the example shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B) is assigned. Note that the "variable display pattern other than the reach variable display pattern" means that, as shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display result does not involve reach, and does not include effects such as pseudo-relation and sliding effect. It is a variable display pattern (variation pattern) used when a big hit does not occur.

  11A and 11B are explanatory diagrams showing the hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B stored in the ROM 54. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B, when it is determined that the variable display result is “big hit” or “small hit”, change pattern determination according to the determination result of the big hit type or the change pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern to any one of a plurality of types based on the random number for random (random 3). Each hit variation pattern determination table 137A to 137B is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. That is, the hit variation pattern determination table 137A is selected as the use table in accordance with the determination result that the variation pattern type is one of the normal CA3-1 to the normal CA3-2 and the super CA3-3, and the variation pattern type is special. The hit variation pattern determination table 137B is selected as the usage table in accordance with the result of the determination to make either CA4-1 or special CA4-2. The hit variation pattern determination tables 137A to 137B are numerical values (determination values) that are compared with the value of the random number (random 3) for variation pattern determination according to the variation pattern type, and the variable display result of the effect design is It includes data (judgment value) corresponding to any of a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to the case of "big hit".

  FIG. 12 is an explanatory diagram showing the deviation variation pattern determination table 138A stored in the ROM 54. When it is determined that the variable display result is “out”, the outlier variation pattern determination table 138A is based on the random number for the variation pattern determination (random 3) according to the determination result of the variation pattern type. It is a table that is referred to in order to determine the variation pattern to be one of a plurality of types. The deviation variation pattern determination table 138A is selected as a usage table according to the determination result of the variation pattern type.

  13 and 14 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560. In the example shown in FIG. 13 and FIG. 14, the command 80XX (H) is a production control command (fluctuation pattern command) for designating a variation pattern of the effect symbol variably displayed on the effect display device 9 in correspondence with the variable display of the special symbol. ) (Each corresponding to the variation pattern XX). That is, when a unique number is given to each of the usable fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 6, there is a fluctuation pattern command corresponding to each of the fluctuation patterns specified by the number. In addition, "(H)" shows that it is a hexadecimal number. Further, the effect control command for designating the variation pattern is also a command for designating the variation start. Therefore, when the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the command 80XX (H), the effect display device 9 controls the effect display device 9 to start variable display of effect symbols.

  Commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are effect control commands indicating whether to make a big hit, whether to make a small hit, and a big hit type. Since the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the display result of the effect symbol according to the reception of the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H), the commands 8C01 (H) to 8C05 (H) are referred to as display result designation commands.

  Command 8D01 (H) is a production control command (first symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started. Command 8D02 (H) is a production control command (second symbol variation designation command) indicating that variable display (variation) of the second special symbol is started. The first symbol variation designation command and the second symbol variation designation command may be collectively referred to as a special symbol identification command (or symbol variation designation command). The variation pattern command may include information indicating whether to start the variable display of the first special symbol or the variable display of the second special symbol.

  Command 8F00 (H) is a production control command (symbol confirmation designation command) indicating that the variable display (variation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result (stop symbol) is derived and displayed. When the effect control microcomputer 100 receives the symbol fixing designation command, the variable display (fluctuation) of the fourth symbol is ended and the display result is derived and displayed.

  The command 9000 (H) is an effect control command (initialization designation command: power-on designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is started. Command 9200 (H) is an effect control command (power failure recovery designation command) transmitted when power supply to the gaming machine is restarted. When the power supply to the gaming machine is started, the gaming control microcomputer 560 transmits a power failure recovery designation command if data is stored in the backup RAM, and otherwise, initializes it. Send a command.

  The command 9F00 (H) is a production control command (customer waiting demonstration designation command) that specifies a customer waiting demonstration.

  The commands A001 and A002 (H) are display control commands (big hit start designation command: fanfare designation command) for displaying the fanfare screen, that is, designating the start of the big hit game. In this embodiment, a big hit start designation command or a small hit / sudden-variable big hit start designation command is used according to the type of big hit. Specifically, a big hit start designation command (A001 (H)) is used in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", and a small hit in the case of "a sudden probability variation big hit" or "small hit" / The sudden probability big hit start designation command (A002 (H)) is used. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a fanfare designating command for sudden probability big hit start designation in the case of a sudden big hit, but does not send a fanfare designating command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  The command A1XX (H) is an effect control command (a special winning opening open designation command) indicating a display during opening of the special winning opening for the number (round) indicated by XX. Further, A2XX (H) is an effect control command (designated command after opening the special winning opening) indicating closing of the special winning opening for the number (round) of XX.

  The command A301 (H) is a production control command (big hit end designation command: ending 1 designation command) for displaying the big hit end screen, that is, designating the end of the big hit game. The jackpot end designation command (A301 (H)) is used when the jackpot game based on the "normal jackpot" or the "probability variation jackpot" is finished. The command A302 (H) is a production control command (small hit / sudden odd change jackpot end designation command: ending 2 designation command) for designating the end of the small hit game or the sudden probability big hit game end. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to transmit an ending designation command for sudden variation big hit end designation in the case of a sudden variation big hit, but not to send an ending designation command in the case of a small hit. Good.

  Command B000 (H) is an effect control command (normal state background designation command) that designates the background display when the game state is the normal state. Command B001 (H) is a production control command (probability variation state background designation command) for designating the background display when the game state is the probable variation state. Command B002 (H) is a production control command (time saving state background designating command) that specifies the background display when the game state is the time saving state.

  Command C000 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number addition designating command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has increased by 1. Command C100 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number addition specification command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has increased by one. Command C200 (H) is an effect control command (first reserved memory number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the first reserved memory number has decreased by 1. Command C300 (H) is an effect control command (second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) that specifies that the second reserved storage number has decreased by 1.

  In this embodiment, as the reserved storage information, for the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number, an effect control command (first reserved storage number addition designation) indicating that the reserved storage number has increased or decreased, respectively. Command, the second reserved storage number addition designation command, the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command, and the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) are transmitted, but the form of the reserved storage information is this embodiment. Not limited to that shown in FIG. 5, for example, the pending storage information in the following modes may be transmitted.

(1) As the reserved storage information, only one command is transmitted, and which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased in the one command is specified, and the increased number of reserved memories. The (first reserved memory number or second reserved memory number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

(2) Only one command is transmitted as the reserved storage information, and which one of the first reserved memory and the second reserved memory has increased in the one command is specified, and the total reserved memory number is set to the EXT data. May be set and transmitted.

(3) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has the starting winning a prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (first start winning prize designation command, second starting winning prize designation command) is transmitted, and separately, a reserved storage number designation command for designating the reserved storage number is transmitted. In the reserved storage number designation command, It is also possible to set the total number of pending storages as EXT data and transmit the EXT data.

(4) As the reserved memory information, which one of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 has the starting winning a prize (whether the first holding memory or the second holding memory has increased) is designated. The production control command (first start winning prize designation command, second starting winning prize designation command) is transmitted, and separately, a reserved storage number designation command for designating the reserved storage number is transmitted. In the reserved storage number designation command, The increased storage number (first storage number or second storage number) may be set as EXT data and transmitted.

  The command C4XX (H) and the command C6XX (H) are effect control commands (a winning determination result specification command) showing the contents of the winning determination result. Of these, the command C4XX (H) is a production control command (symbol design command) that indicates the result of determination of whether or not to be a big hit, whether or not to be a small hit, and a type of big hit among the determination results at the time of winning. is there. In addition, the command C6XX (H) is an effect control command that indicates the determination result (variation pattern type determination result) of the determination value range of the variation pattern type determination random number in the winning determination result. (Variable category command).

  In this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not it is a big hit, whether it is a small hit, or a big hit in a winning effect process (see FIG. 22) described later. Then, it is determined which judgment value range the random number for fluctuation pattern type judgment falls within. Then, in the EXT data of the symbol designating command, a value designating a big hit or a small hit and a value designating the type of the big hit are set, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 100. In addition, the EXT data of the variation category command is set to a value that specifies the range of the determination value as the determination result, and the control is performed to transmit the value to the effect control microcomputer 100. In this embodiment, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize whether or not the display result is a big hit or a small hit, based on the value set in the symbol designating command, and the type of the big hit. Based on the variation category command, the variation pattern type can be recognized when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number becomes a predetermined determination value.

  FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the content of the symbol designating command. As shown in FIG. 15, in this embodiment, EXT data is set and a symbol designating command is transmitted according to whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit and the type of the big hit.

  For example, in the prize effect process described later, when it is determined that the "out", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 1 designating command) in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is determined, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 2 designating command) in which "01 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 3 designating command) in which "02 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designation command (symbol 4 designation command) in which "03 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Further, for example, when it is determined that the "small hit" is determined, the CPU 56 transmits a symbol designating command (designation 5 designating command) in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. The EXT data set in the symbol designating command and the EXT data set in the display result designating command may be shared. With such a configuration, the data to be read can be made common when setting the symbol designating command and when setting the display result designating command.

  16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the variation category command. As shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, in the present embodiment, which gaming state, which display result the display result of the special symbol or the effect symbol is, and the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination at the time of starting winning. A value is set in the EXT data according to whether or not it is determined that the range of the determination value falls within the range, and the variation category command is transmitted.

  For example, when it is determined that the game state is in the normal state and out of the way at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 89 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. Determine whether or not. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 89, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 1 command in which "00 (H)" is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-1 is commonly assigned to the range of the judgment values 1 to 89 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least non-reach CA2-1 based on the receipt of the variation category 1 command. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 90 to 99, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 2 command in which “01 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 100 to 169, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 3 command in which “02 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 170 to 199, the CPU 56 transmits a fluctuation category 4 command in which “03 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 200 to 214, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 5 command in which "04 (H)" is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 215 to 229, the CPU 56 transmits the variation category 6 command in which “05 (H)” is set in the EXT data. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 230 to 251, the CPU 56 transmits the variation category 7 command in which “06 (H)” is set in the EXT data. In this embodiment, when the gaming state is the normal state, the variation pattern type of Super CA2-5 is commonly assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251 regardless of the total number of pending storages. Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 100 can recognize that the variation pattern type is at least Super CA2-5 based on the receipt of the variation category 7 command.

  The thresholds 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229 used to determine which of the above-mentioned variation categories belong specifically to the deviations shown in FIGS. 10A and 10B. It is derived by picking up a value that can be the boundary of the range of the determination value assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table. This also applies to the subsequent variation categories 8 to 9 and 21 to 29, and is assigned to each variation pattern type in the variation pattern type determination table shown in FIGS. 9A to 9D and 10C. A threshold value used for category determination is derived by picking up a value that can be a boundary of the determined determination value range.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the game state is a probable variation state, a time-shortening state, or a deviation at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first sets the value of the variation pattern type determining random number to 1 in step S232 of the winning effect production process described later. .About.219 is determined. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 219 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of non-reach CA2-2), the CPU 56 changes the EXT data set to “07 (H)”. Send a category 8 command. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 220 to 251 (that is, when it is the super CA2-5 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 56 sets “08 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 9 command is transmitted.

  It should be noted that even when the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the variation pattern type of the super CA 2-5 may be assigned to the range of the determination values 230 to 251. By doing so, it is possible to assign a common determination value to the variation pattern types of the super CA 2-5 regardless of the gaming state. Therefore, when executing the process of step S232 of the process for winning a prize, which will be described later, if it is not correct, the common determination process may be performed regardless of the game state, and the program capacity can be further reduced. Further, in this case, the game state determination process of step S226 can be omitted.

  In addition, for example, when it is determined that the "normal jackpot" will be obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 74 in step S232 of the winning effect process described below. To determine. When the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 1 to 74 (that is, when it is the fluctuation pattern type of normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the fluctuation category in which “10 (H)” is set in the EXT data. 21 Send a command. Next, when the value of the fluctuation pattern type determination random number is 75 to 149 (that is, when it is the normal CA3-2 fluctuation pattern type), the CPU 56 sets “11 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 22 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 150 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “12 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 23 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is obtained at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 38 in step S232 of the effect processing at the time of winning described later. To determine. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 38 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which the EXT data is set to “13 (H)”. 24 commands are transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 39 to 79 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of normal CA3-2), the CPU 56 sets “14 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 25 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 80 to 251 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of Super CA3-3), the CPU 56 sets “15 (H)” in the EXT data. The variable category 26 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that the sudden variation big jackpot is suddenly generated at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determining random number is 1 to 100 in step S232 of the effect processing at the time of winning described later. To judge. When the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 1 to 100 (that is, when it is the variation pattern type of the special CA4-1), the CPU 56 sets the variation category in which EXT data is set to “16 (H)”. 27 command is transmitted. Next, when the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is 101 to 251 (that is, when the variation pattern type is the special CA4-2), the CPU 56 sets the variation category to “17 (H)” in the EXT data. 28 command is transmitted.

  Further, for example, when it is determined that a small hit will be made at the time of starting winning, the CPU 56 transmits a variation category 29 command in which “18 (H)” is set in the EXT data.

  It should be noted that the total number of pending storages is not always the same when the winning determination is performed at the time of starting winning and when the actual variation display is started, so the variation indicated by the determination result determination command at the time of winning There may be a case where the pattern type does not match the variation pattern type actually used in the variable display. However, in this embodiment, at least the variation pattern types of non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, and super CA3-3 are assigned common determination values regardless of the total number of pending storages. (See FIGS. 9 and 10), there is no inconsistency between the winning determination result and the variation pattern type of the variation display that is actually executed. Therefore, in this embodiment, a pending notice effect, which is a kind of the look-ahead notice effect, is executed based on the winning determination result that the variation pattern type is non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, or super CA3-3. It Note that only when it is determined that the variation pattern types are the non-reach CA2-1, super CA2-5, and super CA3-3, the variation category commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 (specifically, variation category 1 command, (Variation category 7 command, variation category 23 command, variation category 26 command only) may be transmitted, and the variation category command may not be transmitted in the case of a winning determination result of other variation pattern types. In addition, when it is determined that the other than the non-reach CA2-1, the super CA2-5, and the super CA3-3 at the time of winning, the variation category command indicating that the variation pattern type cannot be specified may be transmitted. Good.

  It should be noted that the “pre-read notice effect” is a notice effect that is executed before the start of the variable display that is the target of the notice effect. In this embodiment, as will be described later, when it is decided to execute a hold notice effect, which is a type of look-ahead notice effect when a start winning is generated, the hold display is in a normal mode (in this example, a white circle display). The special notice display mode (in this example, a blue or red circle display) different from the special display mode is executed to execute the pending notice effect. In addition, in this embodiment, when executing the preliminary announcement effect, the pending display does not directly change from the normal mode to the special display mode, but the pending display is a special display mode (triangle display or rectangular display in this example). There is a case where the effect temporarily changes and the action effect is executed at the timing of the subsequent holding shift to execute the effect that the notice display of the notice hold changes to any special display mode. Hereinafter, the hold display displayed in the normal mode is also referred to as “normal hold”, and the hold display displayed in the special display mode is also referred to as “special hold”. The hold display displayed in the blue display color in the special display mode is also referred to as “blue hold”, and the hold display displayed in the red display color is also referred to as “red hold”.

  Note that the presentation mode of the look-ahead notice effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and in addition to the hold notice effect, for example, as a look-ahead notice effect, special display results such as chance eye patterns are continuously applied over a plurality of variations. Various effects such as performing an effect of stopping and displaying, performing an effect of a mode that counts down over a plurality of fluctuations, and performing an effect of changing the effect mode in a mode in which the background screen changes. Can be considered.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case of executing the pending notice effect so that only the display mode of the hold display can be changed is shown, but, for example, the variable display currently being executed by the display mode inheriting the display mode of the hold display. In a gaming machine configured to display the active display corresponding to, even when the pending display is exhausted and the variable display of the notice target is being executed, the display mode of the active display can be changed. You may comprise.

  The effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) mounted on the effect control board 80 receives the above-described effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main board 31. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the display state of the effect display device 9 is changed, the display state of the lamp is changed, and the sound number data is output to the voice output board 70. To do.

  18 and 19 are flowcharts showing an example of a program of special symbol process processing (step S26) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. As described above, in the special symbol process process, the process for controlling the first special symbol display device 8a or the second special symbol display device 8b and the special winning opening is executed. In the special symbol process processing, the CPU 56, if the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the game ball has won the first starting winning opening 13 is on, that is, the start to the first starting winning opening 13 If a winning has occurred, a first starting opening switch passage process is executed (steps S311 and S312). Further, the CPU 56, if the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the second start winning opening 14 is turned on, that is, the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 has occurred. Then, the second starting opening switch passage processing is executed (steps S313 and S314). Then, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed. If the first start winning opening switch 13a or the second starting opening switch 14a is not turned on, any one of steps S300 to S310 is performed according to the internal state.

  The processes of steps S300 to S310 are the following processes.

  Special symbol normal processing (step S300): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of storages of the numerical data stored in the storage buffer (total storage number). The number of stored numerical data stored in the reserved storage buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total reserved storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the total pending storage number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is a big hit. When making a big hit, the big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The jackpot flag is reset when the jackpot game is over.

  Variation pattern setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 1. In addition, the variation pattern is determined, and the variation time in the variation pattern (variable display time: the time from the start of the variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the variation time of the variable display of the special symbol. Decide to do. In addition, a variation pattern command corresponding to the determined variation pattern is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100, and a variation time timer for measuring the variation time of the special symbol is started. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

  Display result designation command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 2. The control for transmitting the display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

  Special symbol variation process (step S303): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 3. When the variation time of the variation pattern selected in the variation pattern setting process elapses (the variation time timer set in step S301 times out, that is, the value of the variation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 100 determines the symbol. The control for transmitting the designated command is performed, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S304 (4 in this example). It should be noted that the effect control microcomputer 100 controls the effect display device 9 so that the fourth symbol is stopped when the symbol confirmation designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560 is received.

  Special symbol stop process (step S304): is executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 4. When the big hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. When neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4, as will be described later, special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process. The data is set in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data (see FIG. 30), and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in accordance with the setting content of the output buffer in the display control process of step S22.

  Special winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 5. In the special winning opening opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, while performing control to send the special winning opening opening designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to step S306. To a value corresponding to (6 in this example). The special winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round, but when the first round is started, the special winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing for starting a big hit game. In addition, since the special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round with a value designating that round set in the EXT data, a different special winning opening opening designation command is transmitted for each round. For example, when executing the first round during the big hit game, a special winning opening open designation command (A101 (H)) designating round 1 is transmitted, and when executing the tenth round during the big hit game. Sends a special winning opening open designation command (A10A (H)) designating round 10.

  Special winning opening opening process (step S306): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 6. In the process of opening the special winning opening, a process of confirming whether or not the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied is performed. If the closing condition for the special winning opening is satisfied, and if there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to the value corresponding to step S305 (5 in this example). In addition, while performing control to transmit the designation command after opening during the big hit to the production control microcomputer 100, when all rounds are finished, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value corresponding to step S307 (this In the example, update to 7).

  Big hit end processing (step S307): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 7. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform the display control for notifying the player that the jackpot gaming state has ended. Also, a process of setting a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability variation flag or a time saving flag) is performed. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  Small hit opening pre-processing (step S308): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 8. In the small hit opening pre-processing, control for opening the special winning opening is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter that counts the number of game balls that have entered the special winning opening) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. In addition, the execution time of the special winning opening opening process is set by the timer, and the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S309. In addition, the small hit opening pre-processing is executed each time the big winning opening is opened during the small hit game. It is also the process to start.

  Small hitting open process (step S309): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 9. The process of confirming the closing condition of the special winning opening is performed. When the closing condition of the special winning opening is satisfied, and the number of times of opening the special winning opening still remains, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is set to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S308. Update. In addition, when all opening is completed, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 in this example) corresponding to step S310.

  Small hit end processing (step S310): executed when the value of the special symbol process flag is 10. The control for causing the effect control microcomputer 100 to perform the display control for notifying the player that the small hitting game state has ended. Then, the internal state (special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

  FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the starting port switch passage processing in steps S312 and S314. Of these, FIG. 20 (A) is a flowchart showing the first starting opening switch passage processing of step S312. Further, FIG. 20B is a flowchart showing the second starting opening switch passage processing of step S314.

  First, the first starting port switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the first start opening switch passage processing executed when the first start opening switch 13a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 first determines whether or not the first reserved storage number has reached the upper limit value (specifically, It is confirmed whether or not the value of the first reserved memory number counter for counting the number of 1 reserved memories is 4 (step S1211A). If the first number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

  If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S1212A), and at the same time, the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1213A). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating the software random number and storing them in the storage area in the first reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214A). . In the process of step S1214A, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern. The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. Random pattern determination random numbers (random 3) are not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the first start opening switch passage process (at the time of starting winning), but are extracted at the start of variation of the first special symbol. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later.

  FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of an area (holding storage buffer) for storing random numbers and the like corresponding to the holding storage. As shown in FIG. 21, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the first reserved storage number is secured in the first reserved storage buffer. In addition, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit value (4 in this example) of the second reserved storage number is secured in the second reserved storage buffer. In this embodiment, in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, and a variation The pattern type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 3) are stored. The first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating that the gaming state is the time saving state is set (step S1215A). If it is set, the process directly proceeds to step S1220A. If the time saving flag is not set, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (step S1216A). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 5 or more (that is, in the big hit game state or the small hit game state), the CPU 56 proceeds directly to step S1220A.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is less than 5, the winning display effect process is performed in which the variation display result and the variation pattern type when the variation based on the detected starting winning is subsequently executed are determined at the time of starting winning (step). S1217A). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S1218A), and also transmits the variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219A). Further, the CPU 56 controls to send the first reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220A).

  In addition, by executing the processes of steps S1218A and S1219A, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates the symbol every time the start winning in the first starting winning opening 13 is performed and the winning effect process of step S1217A is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, when the process of steps S1218A to S1220A is executed, a start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13, and when the winning effect effect process of step S1217A is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a first reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  However, if the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed by determining Y in step S1215A or step S1216A, the CPU 56 controls in step S1220A to transmit only the first reserved storage number addition designation command. The winning determination result designation command (symbol designation command, variation category command) is not controlled. It should be noted that, when the winning effect process of step S1217A is not executed, a winning judgment result designation is set by setting a value indicating that the winning judgment result cannot be specified (for example, "FF (H)" as EXT data. You may make it transmit a command (designation command, variation category command).

  In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S1215A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize in the first starting winning opening 13, the winning of a step S1217A is performed only when the game state is the normal state. Time performance processing is executed. In addition, in this embodiment, the process of step S1216A is executed, so that when there is a start winning a prize in the first starting winning opening 13, only in a big hit game state or a small hit game state, step S1217A. The effect processing at the time of winning is executed. It should be noted that it is possible not to shift to step S1217A only in the big hit game state, and to shift to step S1217A in the small hit game state to execute the winning effect process.

  Further, in this embodiment, the jackpot gaming state (specific gaming state) is a control in which the jackpot is opened for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) after being notified that the jackpot is started. It is the state until the end of opening the special winning opening of the final round and the notification of ending the big hit. Specifically, the process from the special winning opening opening pre-process (see step S305) to the big hit ending process (see step S307) in the special symbol process process is being executed.

  Next, the second starting opening switch passage processing will be described with reference to FIG. In the second starting opening switch passage processing executed when the second starting opening switch 14a is in the ON state, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the second number of reserved storages reaches the upper limit value (specifically, the second holding). It is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter for counting the storage number is 4 (step S1211B). If the second number of reserved storages has reached the upper limit value, the processing is ended as it is.

  If the second reserved storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increments the value of the second reserved storage number counter by 1 (step S1212B), and at the same time, the value of the total reserved storage number counter for counting the total reserved storage number. Is incremented by 1 (step S1213B). Next, the CPU 56 executes a process of extracting values from the random number circuit 503 and the counter for generating the software random number and storing them in the storage area in the second reserved storage buffer (see FIG. 21) (step S1214B). . In the process of step S1214B, a random number R (big hit determination random number) that is a hardware random number, a big hit type determination random number (random 1) that is a software random number, a variation pattern type determination random number (random 2), and a variation pattern. The judgment random number (random 3) is extracted and stored in the storage area. It should be noted that the random number for fluctuation pattern determination (random 3) is not extracted and stored in the storage area in advance in the second starting port switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning), but is extracted when the fluctuation of the second special symbol is started. You may do it. For example, the game control microcomputer 560 may directly extract a value from a fluctuation pattern determination random number counter for generating a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 3) in a fluctuation pattern setting process described later.

  Next, the CPU 56 executes a winning effect process (step S1217B). Then, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a symbol designating command to the effect control microcomputer 100 based on the determination result of the winning effect process (step S1218B), and also transmits a variation category command to the effect control microcomputer 100. Control is performed (step S1219B). Further, the CPU 56 controls to send the second reserved storage number addition designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1220B).

  In addition, by executing the processes of steps S1218B and S1219B, in this embodiment, the CPU 56 always designates the symbol every time the start winning of the second starting winning opening 14 is performed and the winning effect process of step S1217B is executed. Both the command and the variation category command are transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In addition, in this embodiment, when the process of steps S1218B to S1220B is executed, a start winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 14, and when the winning effect production process of step S1217B is executed, a symbol is designated. A set of three commands, that is, a command, a variable category command, and a second reserved storage number addition designation command are collectively transmitted within one timer interrupt.

  Even in the second starting opening switch passage process, the same process as step S1215A is performed, and if it is a time saving state (including a case where the time variation state is controlled together with the probability variation state), the winning effect effect process of step S1217B is executed. You may not. That is, only in the normal state, the winning effect process in step S1217B may be executed to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command. In this embodiment, as will be described later, the look-ahead notice effect is executed only for the second reserved memory in the time saving state, so conversely, only in the time saving state, at the time of winning in step S1217B. The production process is executed to transmit the symbol designating command and the variation category command, and in the normal state, the winning production process of step S1217B is not executed and the symbol designating command and the variation category command are not transmitted. Good.

  Further, also in the second starting opening switch passage processing, the same processing as in step S1216A may be performed, and the winning effect processing in step S1217B may not be performed if a big hit game is being performed. In addition, in the second starting opening switch passing process, the winning effect effect process of step S1217B may not be executed (that is, the winning judgment process may not be executed for the second special symbol). . With such a configuration, when the prefetching notice effect is executed for a certain period of time, it is possible to surely prevent the prefetching notice effect from being interrupted halfway due to a short variation time.

  22. FIG. 22 is a flow chart showing the winning effect processing in steps S1217A and S1217B. In the winning effect processing, the CPU 56 first compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the normal big hit determination value shown in the left column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not they match (step S220). In this embodiment, at the timing of starting the fluctuation of the special symbol and the effect symbol, whether or not to be a big hit or a small hit in the special symbol normal process described later, determine the big hit type, or change pattern in the change pattern setting process However, apart from that, at the timing when the game ball starts winning in the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, before the variable display based on the starting winning is started, By executing the effect processing at the time of winning, it is confirmed in advance whether or not it is a big hit or a small hit, and which judgment value range the value of the big hit type and the variation pattern type random number is. By doing so, the variable display result and the variation pattern type are predicted in advance before the variable display of the effect symbol is executed, and as described later, based on the determination result at the time of winning, the effect control microcomputer. By 100, a pending notice effect for notifying a big hit or a super reach is displayed while the effect symbols are being displayed in a variable manner.

  If the random number for jackpot determination (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the normal time (N in step S220), the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag indicating that the game state is the high probability state (probability change state). It is confirmed whether or not (step S221). If the probability variation flag is set, the CPU 56 compares the big hit determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with the probability variation time big hit determination value shown in the right column of FIG. It is confirmed whether or not match (step S222). It is to be noted that a plurality of variable displays may be executed during the period from when it is confirmed whether or not the probability change state is in the step S221 at the time of winning the start prize until when the variable display based on the starting prize is actually started. There is. Therefore, the game state is changing during the period from the confirmation of whether or not the probability variation state is in the step S221 at the time of winning the start prize until the start of the variation display based on the starting prize actually (for example, the variation start If there is a sudden big hit or sudden sudden big hit before, it has changed from the normal state to the sudden change state). Therefore, the game state determined in step S221 at the time of start winning and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a mismatch, the one that involves a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Good.

  If the jackpot determination random number (random R) does not match the jackpot determination value at the time of probability variation (N in step S222), the CPU 56 compares the jackpot determination random number (random R) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B with FIG. ) And (C) are compared with the small hitting determination values, and it is confirmed whether or not they match (step S223). In this case, the CPU 56, when there is a start winning into the first starting winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing of step S1217A), the small hit determination table (first It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set for the special symbol). Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect process of step S1217B), the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. It is determined whether or not it matches the small hit determination value set in.

  If the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match the small hit determination value (N in step S223), the CPU 56 sets the EXT data “00 (H)” indicating that it is “out” in the symbol designating command. Is performed (step S224).

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of determining the current gaming state (step S225). In this embodiment, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state and the time saving state in step S225 (specifically, whether the probability variation flag and the time saving flag are set). To judge. It should be noted that, after confirming whether or not the state is the probable variation state and the time saving state at the step S225 at the time of winning the start prize, until a variation display based on the starting prize is actually started, a plurality of Variable display may be executed. Therefore, the game state changes during the period from the confirmation of whether the state is the probability variation state or the time-saving state at the time of winning the start prize until the actual variable display based on the starting prize is started. (For example, when a probability variation big hit or a sudden probability variation big hit occurs before the start of fluctuation, the normal state is changed to the probability variation state.) Therefore, the game state determined in step S225 at the time of winning a start and the game state determined at the start of fluctuation (see step S61 described later) do not always match. In addition, in order to prevent such a mismatch, the one that involves a change in the game state in the currently stored pending memory is specified, and the determination at the time of starting winning is made based on the changed game state. Good.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold value for the deviation according to the determination result of step S225 (step S226). In this embodiment, a threshold value determination program for performing threshold value determination is incorporated in advance, and by determining whether or not the threshold value is larger than the threshold value, the value of the variation pattern type determination random number falls within any of the determination value ranges. Whether or not is determined, and the value of the EXT data set in the variation category command shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 is determined.

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 219 when it is determined that the game state is the probability change state or the time saving state. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232 to be described later whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 219, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 219 (that is, 1 to 219). Determines to set "07 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold value is not less than 219 (that is, 220 to 251), it is determined that "08 (H)" is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  Further, for example, when the CPU 56 determines that the game state is the normal state, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 regardless of the total number of pending storages. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 89, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 89 (that is, 1 to 89). Determines to set "00 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 99 or less (that is, 90 to 99), it is determined to set “01 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold is 169 or less (that is, 100 to 169), it is determined to set “02 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). When the threshold value is 199 or less (that is, 170 to 199), it is determined to set “03 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is less than or equal to 214 (that is, 200 to 214), it is determined to set “04 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). If the threshold is 229 or less (that is, 215 to 229), it is determined to set “05 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16). Further, when it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 229 (that is, when it is 230 to 251), it is determined to set “06 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 16).

  In the example of the threshold value determination shown above, the threshold values are determined in order from the smallest value to 89, 99, 169, 199, 214, and 229. It does not fall below the order threshold. That is, when it is determined whether or not the threshold value is 99 or less after determining whether or not the threshold value is 89 or less, the value does not fall within the range of 1 to 89 which is less than or equal to the threshold value in the previous order and 90 to 99. Will be determined. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the threshold values are determined to be 89, 99, 169, 199, 214 and 229 in order from the smallest value is shown. It may be determined to be 169, 99 and 89. This also applies to the case of making a determination using another threshold value described below.

  The threshold value in the normal state may be always set without performing the game state determination in step S225. Even with such a configuration, the range of the judgment value is made common for at least the fluctuation pattern type that is "out of reach" and the fluctuation pattern type that is "out of reach". It is possible to determine whether or not “out” or “super reach out”.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the small hit determination value (Y in step S223), the CPU 56 sends the EXT data “04 (H)” indicating that the small hit is the symbol designating command. Is set (step S227).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a threshold for small hits (step S228). Note that in this embodiment, the CPU 56 sets the threshold 251 and determines that the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold 251 (1 to 251) in step S232 described later. It is determined that “18 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). In the case of a small hit, it may be determined that the EXT data “18 (H)” is set as it is without performing the threshold determination.

  When the big hit determination random number (random R) matches the big hit determination value in step S220 or step S222, the CPU 56 classifies the big hit based on the big hit type determination random number (random 1) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B. Is determined (step S229). In this case, when there is a start winning prize in the first starting winning opening 13 (when executing the winning effect processing in step S1217A), the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type determination table (first winning prize type shown in FIG. 8D). It is determined whether the big hit type is "normal big hit", "probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit" using the special symbol) 131a. Further, when there is a start winning to the second starting winning opening 14 (when executing the winning effect process of step S1217B), the jackpot type determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8 (E) 131b is used to determine whether the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", "probable variation jackpot", or "sudden variation jackpot".

  Next, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data corresponding to the jackpot type determination result in the symbol designating command (step S230). In this case, when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is reached, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "01 (H)" indicating that the "normal big hit" is set in the symbol designating command. In addition, when it is determined that the "probable variation big hit" is determined, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "02 (H)" indicating that the "probability variation big hit" is the symbol designating command. Further, when it is determined that the "sudden probability big hit", the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data "03 (H)" indicating that the "sudden probability big hit" is in the symbol designating command.

  Then, the CPU 56 sets each threshold for big hits in accordance with the big hit type determined in step S229 (step S231).

  For example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 74 and 149 when it is determined that the "normal big hit" is made. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232 described later whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is equal to or less than the threshold value 74, and when it is equal to or less than the threshold value 74 (that is, 1 to 74). Determines to set “10 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is 149 or less (that is, 75 to 149), it is determined to set “11 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If it is not equal to or less than the threshold value 149 (that is, if it is 150 to 251,) it is determined to set “12 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold values 38 and 79 when it is determined that the “probable variation big hit” has occurred. In this case, in step S232 described later, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is equal to or less than the threshold value 38, and when the value is equal to or less than the threshold value 38 (that is, 1 to 38). Determines to set “13 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). If the threshold is 79 or less (that is, 39 to 79), it is determined that “14 (H)” is set as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold value is not 79 or less (that is, 80 to 251), it is determined to set “15 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  In addition, for example, the CPU 56 sets the threshold value 100 when it is determined that “the sudden probability big hit”. In this case, the CPU 56 determines in step S232 to be described later whether or not the value of the random number for fluctuation pattern type determination is 100 or less, and when the value is 100 or less (that is, 1 to 100). Determines to set "16 (H)" as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17). When the threshold value is not 100 or less (that is, 101 to 251), it is determined to set “17 (H)” as the EXT data of the variation category command (see FIG. 17).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the threshold set in steps S226, S228, and S231 and the variation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted in steps S1214A and S1214B to determine which value of the variation pattern type determination random number. It is determined whether it is within the range of the determination value (step S232).

  In addition, in steps S226, S228, and S231, instead of setting a predetermined threshold value, the fluctuation pattern type determination table (see FIGS. 9 and 10) is set, and in step S232, the set fluctuation pattern type is set. The determination table may be used to determine the range of the value of the random number for determining the variation pattern type and which variation pattern type.

  Then, the CPU 56 performs a process of setting the EXT data according to the determination result in the variation category command (step S233). Specifically, the CPU 56 determines from “00 (H)” to “08 (H)” and “10” as shown in FIG. 16 and FIG. 17, depending on which variation pattern type is determined in step S232. (H) "to" 18 (H) "is set in the EXT data of the variable category command.

  In addition, in the present embodiment, the case where the value of the variation pattern type determination random number is uniformly determined is shown even if it is determined that the big hit or the small hit is determined in the winning determination. When it is determined that a big hit or a small hit is reached, the range of the value of the variation pattern type determination random number may not be determined. Then, it may be possible to send a symbol designating command indicating that it has been determined at the time of winning when it is a big hit or a small hit, and to send a variation category command that comprehensively indicates that it is a variation pattern type of a big hit or a small hit. . Then, for example, although the effect control microcomputer 100 does not specifically indicate which variation pattern type, the variation which is comprehensively represented as one of the variation pattern types of the big hits. Based on the reception of the category command, a pending notice effect described later may be executed.

  23 and 24 are flowcharts showing the special symbol normal process (step S300) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol normal process, the CPU 56 confirms the value of the total number of pending storages (step S51). Specifically, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is confirmed. If the total pending storage number is 0, and if the customer waiting demo designating command has not been transmitted yet, control is performed to transmit the customer waiting demo designating command to the production control microcomputer 100 (step S51A), and the processing is executed. finish. Note that, for example, when the CPU 56 transmits the customer waiting demo designation command in step S51A, the CPU 56 sets a customer waiting demo designation command transmitted flag indicating that the customer waiting demo designation command has been transmitted. Then, when the special symbol normal processing after the next timer interrupt is executed after sending the customer wait demo designation command, the customer wait is repeated based on that the customer wait demo designation command sent flag is set. It may be controlled so as not to send the demo designation command. Further, in this case, the customer waiting demonstration designation command transmitted flag may be reset when the next variable display of the special symbol is started.

  If the total pending storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 confirms whether the second pending storage number is 0 (step S52). Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the value of the second reserved storage number counter is 0. If the second reserved storage number is not 0, the CPU 56 is a special symbol pointer (a flag indicating whether special symbol process processing is being performed for the first special symbol or special symbol process processing is being performed for the second special symbol). Is set to data indicating "second" (step S53). If the second reserved memory number is 0 (that is, only the first reserved memory number is accumulated), the CPU 66 sets data indicating "first" to the special symbol pointer (step S54).

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S52 to S54, the variable display of the second special symbol is preferentially executed with respect to the variable display of the first special symbol. In other words, the second start condition for starting the variable display of the second special symbol is controlled so as to take precedence over the first start condition for starting the variable display of the first special symbol. Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed in the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14. You may comprise.

  In the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is configured to be preferentially executed as shown in this embodiment, in the winning effect production process shown in FIG. 22, the big hit determination random number (random R) is used. Only the process of comparing the value with the jackpot determination value in the low probability state may be executed, and may not be compared with the jackpot determination value in the probability changing state (specifically, only the process of step S220 is performed. , S221 and S222 may not be performed). With such a configuration, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed with priority, between the determination result of the big hit in the determination at the time of winning and the determination result of the big hit at the start of the actual variation. It is possible to prevent the deviation.

  Next, in the RAM 55, the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of reserved memories = 1 indicated by the special symbol pointer and stores it in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S55). Specifically, the CPU 56, when the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of reserved memories = 1 in the first reserved memory buffer. Is read out and stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 reads out each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = 1 in the second reserved storage buffer. It is stored in the random number buffer area of the RAM 55.

  Then, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the reserved storage number counter indicated by the special symbol pointer, and shifts the contents of each storage area (step S56). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the count value of the first reserved storage number counter, and the storage area of each storage area in the first reserved storage buffer. Shift content. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the count value of the second reserved storage number counter is decremented by 1, and the contents of each storage area in the second reserved storage buffer are shifted.

  That is, the CPU 56, in the case where the special symbol pointer indicates “first”, in the storage area corresponding to the first reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. Each stored random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages = n-1. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", each is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second reserved storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second reserved storage buffer of the RAM 55. The random number value is stored in the storage area corresponding to the second number of reserved storages = n-1. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective first reserved memory numbers (or the respective second reserved memory numbers) are always extracted is always the first reserved memory number (or, The second reserved memory number) = 1, 2, 3, 4 and the order.

  Then, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the total pending storage number by 1. That is, the count value of the total pending storage number counter is decremented by 1 (step S58). The CPU 56 stores the value of the total pending storage number counter before the count value is subtracted by 1 in a predetermined area of the RAM 55.

  Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit a background designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 according to the current game state (step S60). In this case, when the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the probability variation state background designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the time saving state background designation command when only the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set and the probability variation flag is not set. If neither the probability variation flag nor the time saving flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to send the normal state background designating command.

  In addition, specifically, when transmitting the effect control command to the effect control microcomputer 100, the CPU 56 sets the address of the command transmission table (set in advance in the ROM for each command) according to the effect control command. Set it to a pointer. Then, the address of the command transmission table corresponding to the effect control command is set in the pointer, and the effect control command is transmitted in the effect control command control process (step S28). In this embodiment, when the variation of the special symbol is started, the background designation command, the variation pattern command, the display result designation command, the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction) for each timer interrupt. The designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted in this order to the effect control microcomputer 100. Specifically, when the fluctuation of the special symbol is started, first, the background designation command is transmitted, the variation pattern command is transmitted after 4 ms, and the display result designation command is further transmitted after 4 ms, and further after 4 ms. The reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) is transmitted. In addition, when the variation of the special symbol is started, a symbol variation designation command (first symbol variation designation command, second symbol variation designation command) is also transmitted, but the symbol variation designation command is the same timer interrupt as the variation pattern command. Is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 100.

  In the special symbol normal process, first, the data indicating "first" indicating that the process is executed for the first starting winning opening 13, that is, the first special symbol indicating that the process is executed for "first" Or data indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second start winning opening 14, that is, indicating "second" indicating that the process is executed for the second special symbol. The data is set in the special symbol pointer. Then, in the subsequent processing in the special symbol process processing, processing according to the data set in the special symbol pointer is executed. Therefore, the processes of steps S300 to S310 can be shared between the case of targeting the first special symbol and the case of targeting the second special symbol.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads a random R (random number for jackpot determination) from the random number buffer area and executes the jackpot determination module. In this case, the CPU 56 uses the first start opening switch passing process S1214A and the second starting opening switch passing process S1214B and stores them in advance in the first pending storage buffer and the second pending storage buffer for jackpot determination. Read the random number and judge the big hit. The jackpot determination module compares a predetermined jackpot determination value or a jackpot determination value (see FIG. 8) with a jackpot determination random number, and when they match, executes processing to determine a jackpot or a jackpot. It is a program to do. That is, it is a program that executes the processing of the big hit judgment and the small hit judgment.

  In the jackpot determination process, when the gaming state is the probable variation state, the probability of being a jackpot is higher than when the gaming state is the non-probability variation state (normal state or time saving state). Specifically, the probability variation big hit determination table (table in which the numerical value on the right side of FIG. 8A in ROM 54 is set) in which a large number of big hit determination values are set in advance and the number of big hit determination values An ordinary jackpot determination table (a table in which the numerical values on the left side of FIG. 8A in the ROM 54 are set) that is set to be smaller than the hour jackpot determination table is provided. Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the gaming state is the probability variation state, and when the gaming state is the probability variation state, performs the jackpot determination process using the probability variation big jackpot determination table, and the gaming state is normal. When it is in the state, the jackpot determination table is used to perform the jackpot determination process in the normal state. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the big hit determination values shown in FIG. 8 (A), the CPU 56 determines to make a big hit for the special symbol. When it is determined to be a big hit (step S61), the process proceeds to step S71. It should be noted that determining whether or not to be a big hit is to determine whether or not to shift to a big hit game state, but to determine whether or not to make a stop symbol in the special symbol display device a big hit symbol But also.

  The confirmation as to whether or not the current game state is the probability variation state is performed by whether or not the probability variation flag is set. The probability variation flag is set when shifting the game state to the probability variation state, and reset when ending the probability variation state. Specifically, it is determined to be a "probably odds big hit" or "a suddenly odds big hit", and is set in the process of ending the big hit game. After the jackpot game is over, it is reset when the next jackpot occurs.

  If the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) does not match any of the big hit determination values (N in step S61), the CPU 56 uses the small hit determination table (see FIGS. 8B and 8C). Then, the small hit determination process is performed. That is, when the value of the big hit determination random number (random R) matches any of the small hit determination values shown in FIGS. 8B and 8C, the CPU 56 determines that the special symbol is a small hit. In this case, the CPU 56 confirms the data indicated by the special symbol pointer, and if the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is “first”, the small hit determination table (for the first special symbol) shown in FIG. 8B. ) Is used to determine whether to make a small hit. Further, when the data indicated by the special symbol pointer is "second", it is determined whether or not to make a small hit by using the small hit determination table (for the second special symbol) shown in FIG. 8C. . Then, when it is determined to be a small hit (step S62), the CPU 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that it is a small hit (step S63), and proceeds to step S75.

  If the value of the random R does not match either the big hit judgment value or the small hit judgment value (N in step S62), that is, if it is out of alignment, the process directly proceeds to step S75.

  In step S71, the CPU 56 sets a big hit flag indicating that it is a big hit. Then, as the table used for determining the jackpot type to any one of a plurality of types, the jackpot type determination table indicated by the special symbol pointer is selected (step S72). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 selects the jackpot type determination table 131a for the first special symbol shown in FIG. 8D. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates “second”, the CPU 56 selects the big hit type determination table 131b for the second special symbol shown in FIG. 8 (E).

  Next, the CPU 56 uses the selected jackpot type determination table to select a type (“normal jackpot”, “probable variation”) corresponding to a value that matches the value of the random number (random 1) for jackpot type determination stored in the random number buffer area. "Big hit" or "suddenly sudden change big hit") is determined as the type of big hit (step S73). In this case, the CPU 56 determines the jackpot type which is extracted in step S1214A of the first starting opening switch passage processing or step S1214B of the second starting opening switch passage processing and stored in advance in the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer. The random number for use is read and the jackpot type is determined. Further, in this case, as shown in FIGS. 8D and 8E, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, compared with the case where the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. Therefore, there is a high percentage of sudden probability jackpots being selected.

  Further, the CPU 56 sets the data indicating the determined jackpot type in the jackpot type buffer in the RAM 55 (step S74). For example, when the big hit type is "normal big hit", "01" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, and when the big hit type is "probable variation big hit", "02" is set as the data indicating the big hit type, When the big hit type is "sudden probability big hit", "03" is set as data indicating the big hit type.

  Next, the CPU 56 determines the stop symbol of the special symbol (step S75). Specifically, when neither the big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set, "-" which is a deviating symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. When the big hit flag is set, one of the big hit symbols, "1", "3", and "7", is determined as the special symbol stop symbol, depending on the big hit type determination result. That is, when the jackpot type is determined to be "suddenly sudden change jackpot", "1" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol, and when "normal jackpot" is determined, "3" is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol. However, when the "probability variation big hit" is determined, "7" is determined as the stop symbol of the special symbol. Further, when the small hit flag is set, "5" which is a small hit symbol is determined as a stop symbol of the special symbol.

  In this embodiment, the big hit type is first determined, and the case of determining the stop symbol of the special symbol corresponding to the determined big hit type is shown, but the method of determining the big symbol type and the stop symbol of the special symbol is The invention is not limited to those shown in the embodiments. For example, a table in which the stop symbols of the special symbols are associated with the jackpot types in advance is prepared, and the stop symbols of the special symbols are first determined based on the random number for determining the jackpot type, and the corresponding jackpots are determined based on the determination result. The type may be determined.

  Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the variation pattern setting process (step S301) (step S76).

  FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern setting process (step S301) in the special symbol process process. In the variation pattern setting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S91). When the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56 uses the big hit fluctuation pattern type determination tables 132A to 132C (FIG. 9 (A) as a table to be used for determining the fluctuation pattern type as one of a plurality of kinds. )-(C)) (step S92). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the big hit flag is not set, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S93). When the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 determines that the small hit variation pattern type determination table 132D (FIG. 9D is used as a table used to determine one of the plurality of types of variation pattern types. ) Reference) is selected (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the small hit flag is not set either, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the time saving flag indicating the time saving state is set (step S95). The time saving flag is set when the gaming state is changed to the probability changing state or the time saving state, and is reset when ending the time saving state. Specifically, when it is determined to be a "normal big hit", a time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. In addition, after the big hit game is finished, it is reset when the variable display of a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) is finished. The time saving flag is reset even when the next big hit occurs even before the variable display for the predetermined number of times is finished. Further, when it is determined to be the "probability variation big hit" or "sudden probability variation big hit", the probability variation flag is set and the time saving flag is set in the process of ending the big hit game. Then, when the next big hit occurs, the time saving flag is reset together with the probability variation flag.

  If the time saving flag is not set (N in step S95), the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the total pending storage number is 3 or more (step S96). If the total number of pending storages is less than 3 (N in step S96), the CPU 56 determines that the variation pattern type determination table 135A (for deviation) is used as a table used to determine one of the plurality of variation pattern types. (See FIG. 10A) is selected (step S97). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the total number of pending storages is 3 or more (Y in step S96), the CPU 56 determines that the fluctuation pattern type determination table for deviation is a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern type to any one of a plurality of types. 135B (see FIG. 10B) is selected (step S98). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  When the time saving flag is set (Y in step S95), that is, when the gaming state is the probability changing state or the time saving state (in this embodiment, when the game state is shifted to the probability changing state, the time saving state is always set. Since it is also shifted (see steps S169 and S170), if it is determined to be Y in step S95, there are cases of a probable variation state and cases where control is performed only in the time saving state. As the table used to determine any of the plurality of types, the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 135C (see FIG. 10C) is selected (step S99). Then, the process proceeds to step S100.

  In this embodiment, by performing the processing of steps S95 to S99, when the gaming state is the normal state and the total number of pending storages is 3 or more, the deviation variation shown in FIG. The pattern type determination table 135B is selected. If the gaming state is the probability variation state or the time saving state, the out-of-shift variation pattern type determination table 135C shown in FIG. 10C is selected. In this case, the non-reach CA2-2 may be determined as the variation pattern type in the process of step S100 described later, and when the variation pattern type of the non-reach CA2-2 is determined, the variation is performed in the process of step S102. Non-reach PA1-2 with shortening fluctuation is determined as a pattern (see FIG. 12). Therefore, in this embodiment, when the gaming state is the probable variation state or the time saving state, or when the total pending storage number is 3 or more, the variation display of the shortening variation may be displayed. In this embodiment, the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation used in the probability variation state or the time saving state (see FIG. 10C) and the variation pattern type determination table for shortened variation based on the number of pending storages (see FIG. 10 (B)) is a different table, but a common table may be used as the variation pattern type determination table for shortening variation.

  Next, the CPU 56 reads Random 2 (random number for fluctuation pattern type determination) from the random number buffer area (first pending storage buffer or second pending storage buffer) and selects it in the processing of step S92, S94, S97, S98, or S99. By referring to the table, the variation pattern type is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S100).

  Next, the CPU 56 determines whether or not the variation pattern is one of a plurality of variation pattern types based on the determination result of the variation pattern type in step S100, as the variation pattern determination tables 137A and 137B (see FIG. 11). ), And one of the deviation variation pattern determination tables 138A (see FIG. 12) is selected (step S101). Further, the random pattern 3 is read from the random number buffer area (the first pending storage buffer or the second pending storage buffer), and the fluctuation pattern determination table selected in the process of step S101 is referred to, thereby changing the fluctuation pattern. Is determined to be one of a plurality of types (step S102). When the random number 3 (fluctuation pattern determination random number) is not extracted at the timing of the start winning, the CPU 56 causes the variation pattern determination random number counter to generate the variation pattern determination random number (random 3). It is also possible to directly extract the value from and to determine the variation pattern based on the extracted random number value.

  Next, the CPU 56 performs control to transmit the symbol variation designation command indicated by the special symbol pointer to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S103). Specifically, when the special symbol pointer indicates "first", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first symbol variation designation command. Further, when the special symbol pointer indicates "second", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second symbol variation designation command. Further, the CPU 56 performs control for transmitting an effect control command (fluctuation pattern command) corresponding to the determined fluctuation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S104).

  Next, the CPU 56 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time corresponding to the selected fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation time timer formed in the RAM 55 (step S105). Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the display result designation command transmission process (step S302) (step S106).

  FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the display result designation command transmission process (step S302). In the display result designation command transmission process, the CPU 56 transmits any one of the production control commands (display result 1 designation to display result 5 designation) (see FIG. 13) according to the determined type of big hit, small hit, or loss. Control. Specifically, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S110). If not set, the process proceeds to step S116. When the jackpot flag is set and the jackpot type is "normal jackpot", control is performed to transmit the display result 2 designation command (steps S111 and S112). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". . Further, when the type of the big hit is "probable variation big hit", the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 3 designation command (steps S113 and S114). Whether or not the "probable variation big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "02". . Then, when it is neither "normal big hit" nor "probability variation big hit" (that is, when it is "a sudden probability variation big hit"), the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 4 designation command (step S115).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag is not set (N in step S110), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S116). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 5 designation command (step S117). When the small hit flag is not set (N in step S116), that is, when it is out of alignment, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the display result 1 designation command (step S118).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol changing process (step S303) (step S119).

  FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the special symbol changing process (step S303) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 56 first confirms whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command (the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command or the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command) has already been transmitted ( Step S1121). Whether or not the pending storage number subtraction designation command has already been transmitted indicates, for example, that the pending storage number subtraction designation command has been transmitted when the pending storage number subtraction designation command is transmitted in step S1122 described later. The storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag may be set, and in step S1121, it may be confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set. Further, in this case, the set storage number subtraction designation command transmitted flag is set to be reset by special symbol stop processing or jackpot ending processing described later when terminating variable display of special symbols or ending jackpot. Good.

  Next, if the reserved storage number subtraction designation command has not been transmitted, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the reserved storage number subtraction designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1122). In this case, when the value indicating "first" is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command. Further, when the value indicating "second" is set to the special symbol pointer, the CPU 56 controls to transmit the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command.

  Next, the CPU 56 subtracts 1 from the variable time timer (step S1125), and when the variable time timer times out (step S1126), performs control to transmit a symbol confirmation designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S1127). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1128). If the variable time timer has not timed out, the process is terminated as it is.

  FIG. 28 is a flowchart showing the special symbol stop process (step S304) in the special symbol process process. In the special symbol stop process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit flag is set (step S131). If the big hit flag is set, the CPU 56, if set, the probability variation flag indicating the probability variation state, the time saving flag indicating the time saving state, and the number of times the special symbol can fluctuate in the time saving state. Is reset (step S132), and control for transmitting the big hit start designation command to the effect control microcomputer 100 is performed (step S133). Specifically, when the type of the big hit is "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", a big hit start designation command (command A001 (H)) is transmitted. If the type of the big hit is the sudden probability big hit, the small hit / suddenly sudden big hit start designation command (command A002 (H)) is transmitted. It should be noted that whether the type of jackpot is "normal jackpot", "probability variation jackpot", or "sudden variation jackpot" is data indicating the jackpot type stored in the RAM 55 (data stored in the jackpot type buffer). It is judged based on.

  In addition, the big hit display time timer is set to a value corresponding to the big hit display time (for example, the time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the big hit has occurred) (step S134). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, 15 times in the case of "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit" and twice in the case of "a sudden probability variation big hit") is set in the special winning opening release counter (step S135). . Also, the round time per round in the big hit game is set. Specifically, in the case of sudden probability big hit, the round time is set to 0.1 second, and in the case of normal big hit or probability variable big hit, the round time is set to 29 seconds. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the special winning opening opening preprocessing (step S305) (step S136).

  If the big hit flag is not set in step S131, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the time saving counter showing the variable number of times of the special symbol in the time saving state is 0 (step S137). If the value of the hour / hour counter is not 0, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the hour / hour counter by -1 (step S138). Then, when the value of the hour / hour counter after subtraction becomes 0 (step S139), the CPU 56 resets the hour / hour flag (step S140).

  Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the small hit flag is set (step S141). If the small hit flag is set, the CPU 56 sends a small hit / suddenly probable variation big hit start command (command A002 (H)) to the effect control microcomputer 100 (step S142). Further, a value corresponding to the small hit display time (a time at which the effect display device 9 notifies that the small hit has occurred, for example) is set in the small hit display time timer (step S143). In addition, the number of times of opening (for example, twice) is set in the special winning opening opening counter (step S144). Also, the opening time for each big winning opening in the small hit game is set. Specifically, 0.1 seconds, which is the same as the round time for sudden probability big hit, is set as the opening time for each big winning opening in the small hit game. Then, the value of the special symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the small hit start preprocessing (step S308) (step S145).

  If the small hit flag is not set (N in step S141), the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S146).

  FIG. 29 is a flowchart showing a big hit ending process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the jackpot end process, the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot end display timer is set (step S160), and if the jackpot end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S164. When the big hit end display timer is not set, the big hit flag is reset (step S161), and the big hit end designation command is transmitted (step S162). Here, if it is a "normal big hit" or "probability variation big hit", a big hit end designation command (command A301 (H)) is transmitted, and if it is "sudden probability variation big hit", small hit / sudden probability variation big hit An end designation command (command A302 (H)) is transmitted. Then, the big hit end display timer is set to a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time during which the big hit end display is being performed on the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) (step S163), and the process ends.

  In step S164, the value of the jackpot end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S164). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0, that is, whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S165). If not, the process ends.

  If the jackpot end display time has passed (Y in step S165), the CPU 56 checks whether or not the jackpot to be finished this time is a normal jackpot (step S166). Whether or not the "normal big hit" can be specifically determined by checking whether or not the data set in the big hit type buffer in step S74 of the special symbol normal processing is "01". . If it is a normal big hit, the CPU 56 sets the time saving flag and shifts to the time saving state (step S167). Further, the CPU 56 sets a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) in the time saving counter (step S168).

  If it is not a normal big hit (that is, if it is a probability big hit or a sudden probability big hit), the CPU 56 sets the probability change flag to shift to the probability change state (step S169) and sets the time saving flag to shift to the time saving state. (Step S170).

  Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special symbol normal process (step S300) (step S171).

  FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing an example of a program of special symbol display control processing (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main board 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, during the execution of the special symbol variation process), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data. A process for setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates the special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b according to the content of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting, The variable display of the special symbols on the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b is executed.

  If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (step S3203). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, in the case of shifting to the special symbol stop process), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal process. A process of setting the display control data in the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) indicated by the special symbol pointer. Then, after that, the display control process (see step S22) is executed, and the drive signal is output to the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b according to the content of the output buffer for the special symbol display control data setting, In the special symbol display devices 8a and 8b, the stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

  Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 31 is a flowchart showing the main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, effect control CPU 101) as the effect control means mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 101 starts executing the main process. In the main processing, first, initialization processing for clearing the RAM area, setting various initial values, and initializing a timer for determining the activation interval (for example, 4 ms) of the effect control is performed (step S701). . After that, the effect control CPU 101 shifts to the loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When the timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 101 sets the timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. If the timer interrupt flag is set in the main process, the effect control CPU 101 clears the flag (step S703) and executes the following effect control process.

  In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 101 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag according to the received effect control command (command analysis process: step S704).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs effect control process processing (step S705). In the production control process process, the process corresponding to the current control state (production control process flag) is selected from among the processes corresponding to the control state, and the display control of the production display device 9 is executed.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs a fourth symbol process process (step S706). In the fourth symbol process processing, among the processes according to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (fourth symbol process flag) is selected and the fourth symbol display areas 9c and 9d of the effect display device 9 are selected. Display control of the fourth symbol is executed.

  Next, a random number updating process of updating the count value of the counter for generating a random number such as a jackpot symbol determining random number is executed (step S707). Then, it transfers to step S702.

  32 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main board 31. In this example, a ring buffer type command receiving buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command receiving buffer is composed of the 12-byte area of the receiving command buffers 1-12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area to store the received command is used. The command reception number counter takes a value of 0-11. The ring buffer format is not always required.

  33 to 35 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). The effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the received command buffer, but in the command analysis processing, the effect control CPU 101 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

  In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a received command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether it is stored or not is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where both match is the case where the received command is not stored. When the received command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 101 reads the received command from the command reception buffer (step S612). When read, the value of the read pointer is set to +2 (step S613). The reason for adding +2 is that 2 bytes (1 command) are read.

  If the received effect control command is the variation pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation pattern command in the variation pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

  If the received effect control command is the display result specifying command (step S617), the effect control CPU 101 forms the received display result specifying command (display result 1 specifying command to display result 5 specifying command) in the RAM. The display result designation command storage area is stored (step S618).

  If the received production control command is the symbol confirmation designation command (step S619), the production control CPU 101 sets the confirmation command reception flag (step S620).

  If the received production control command is any of the symbol designating commands (step S621), the production control CPU 101 sends the received symbol designating command to the first empty space in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. (Step S622).

  If the received effect control command is any variation category command (step S623), the effect control CPU 101 stores the received variation category command in each storage area of the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. The latest symbol designating command is stored in the storage area (step S624).

  If the received effect control command is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S625), the effect control CPU 101 sends the received first reserved storage number addition designation command to the start winning award command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S626). However, when the gaming state is a probability change state, a time saving state, a big hit game state, or a small hit game state, the symbol designating command and the variation category command are not transmitted, and only the first reserved storage number addition designating command is transmitted. In some cases (see steps S1215A to S1219A), in this case, the effect control CPU 101 issues the received first reserved storage number addition designation command in the start winning command storage area formed in the RAM. Store in the first storage area.

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increments the hold display by one in the normal mode (in this example, the white circular display) on the first hold storage display unit 9a, and then the first hold storage display unit 9a holds the first hold display. The memory count display is updated (step S627). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S628).

  When the received production control command is the second reserved storage number addition designation command (step S629), the effect control CPU 101 uses the received second reserved storage number addition designation command as the start winning award command formed in the RAM. Among the storage areas of the storage area, the latest symbol designating command and the variable category command are stored in the storage area (step S630).

  Further, the effect control CPU 101 increases the hold display by one in the normal mode (in this example, the white circular display) on the second hold storage display section 9b, and the second hold storage display section 9b holds the second hold. The memory number display is updated (step S631). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 adds 1 to the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S632).

  If the received effect control command is the first hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S633), the effect control CPU 101 erases one hold display in the first hold storage display unit 9a and sets the remaining hold display to 1. It shifts by one by one, and the first reserved memory number display in the first reserved memory display portion 9a is updated (step S634). Further, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S635).

  If the received effect control command is the second hold storage number subtraction designation command (step S636), the effect control CPU 101 erases one hold display in the second hold storage display unit 9b and sets the remaining hold display to 1. It shifts by one by one, and the second reserved memory number display in the second reserved memory display portion 9b is updated (step S637). In addition, the effect control CPU 101 subtracts 1 from the value of the second reserved storage number stored in the second reserved storage number storage area formed in the RAM (step S638).

  If the received effect control command is the normal state background designating command (step S639), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the normal state (for example, a blue display color). Change to the background screen) (step S640). Further, the effect control CPU 101, if set, resets the time saving state flag indicating that the game state is the time saving state (step S641).

  If the received effect control command is the time saving state background designation command (step S642), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the time saving state (for example, with a green display color). The screen is changed to the background screen (step S643). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets a time saving state flag (step S644). Further, the effect control CPU 101, if set, resets the probability variation state flag indicating that the gaming state is the probability variation state (step S645).

  If the received effect control command is the probability variation state background designation command (step S646), the effect control CPU 101 sets the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen corresponding to the probability variation state (for example, with a red display color). The screen is changed to the background screen (step S647). Further, the effect control CPU 101 sets the probability variation state flag (step S648).

  If the received production control command is the first symbol variation designation command (step S649), the production control CPU 101 sets the first symbol variation designation command reception flag (step S650). If the received effect control command is the second symbol variation designation command (step S651), the effect control CPU 101 sets the second symbol variation designation command reception flag (step S652).

  If the received effect control command is any other command, the effect control CPU 101 sets a flag according to the received effect control command (step S653). For example, if the received effect control command is a big hit start designation command, the big hit start designation command reception flag is set, and if the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command, the big hit end designation command reception flag is set. Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

  FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing the effect control process process (step S705) in the main process shown in FIG. In the effect control process process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a pending notice effect setting process for setting presence / absence of a pending notice effect and a change pattern (step S800A).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 performs any one of steps S800 to S807 according to the value of the effect control process flag. In each process, the following process is executed. In the production control process process, the display state of the production display device 9 is controlled and the variable display of the production symbols is realized. The control related to the variable display of the effect symbol synchronized with the change of the special symbol is also executed in one effect control process process.

  Fluctuating pattern command reception waiting process (step S800): It is confirmed whether a varying pattern command is received from the game control microcomputer 560. Specifically, it is confirmed whether or not the fluctuation pattern command reception flag set in the command analysis process is set. If the fluctuation pattern command is received, the value of the effect control process flag is changed to the value corresponding to the effect design fluctuation start process (step S801).

  Production symbol variation start processing (step S801): control is performed so that variation of the production symbol is started. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect design (step S802).

  Process during production symbol fluctuation (step S802): The switching timing of each fluctuation state (fluctuation speed) forming the fluctuation pattern is controlled, and the end of the fluctuation time is monitored. Then, when the variation time ends, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the effect symbol variation stop processing (step S803).

  Production symbol variation stop process (step S803): The variation of the production symbol is stopped and the control for deriving and displaying the display result (stopped symbol) is performed. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S804) or the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  Big hit display process (step S804): After the change time ends, control is performed to display a screen for notifying the occurrence of big hit on the effect display device 9. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Processing during round (step S805): Display control during round is performed. Then, when the round end condition is satisfied, if the final round has not ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the post-round processing (step S806). If the final round has ended, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the big hit ending process (step S807).

  Post-round processing (step S806): Display control between rounds is performed. Then, when the round start condition is satisfied, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the in-round process (step S805).

  Big hit end production process (step S807): In the production display device 9, display control is performed to notify the player that the big hit game state has ended. Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the variable pattern command reception waiting process (step S800).

  FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing the pending notice effect setting process (step S800A). In the pending notice effect setting process, the effect control CPU 101 first sets a set of commands at the time of starting winning (that is, a symbol designation command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command). Alternatively, it is confirmed whether or not a new set of the second reserved storage number addition designation command) has been newly received (step S6001). Specifically, a set of symbol designation command, variation category command, and reserved storage number addition designation command (first reserved storage number addition designation command or second reserved storage number addition designation command) are stored in the start winning command storage area. It can be confirmed by determining whether or not it is newly stored. If a new set of commands for starting winning is not received, the process is terminated.

  If a set of commands for starting winning is newly received, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the probability variation state flag or the time saving state flag is set (step S6002). If the probability variation state flag or the time saving state flag is set (that is, if it is the probability variation state or the time saving state), the processing is ended as it is.

  If neither the probability variation state flag nor the time saving state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 newly receives the reserved storage number addition designation command (newly stored in the start winning command storage area). It is confirmed whether or not the reserved storage number addition designation command stored in (1) is the first reserved storage number addition designation command (step S6003). If the first reserved storage number addition designation command has not been newly received (that is, if the second reserved storage number addition designation command has been newly received), the processing ends.

  By executing the processing of steps S6002 and S6003, in the present embodiment, only when a new start winning is generated in the first start winning opening 13 while the game state is controlled to the normal state, The processing after step S6004 is executed, and it is possible to execute the pending notice effect.

  Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, the pending notice effect can be executed even when the start winning is generated in the second starting winning opening 14 while being controlled to the probable variation state or the time saving state. You may comprise.

  Further, for example, when it is configured to execute the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the winning order to the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14, the game state is a normal state, It is possible to execute the pending announcement effect regardless of whether it is in the probability changing state or the time saving state, and regardless of which of the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 is the starting winning. You may comprise.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the first number of reserved storages is 2 or more (step S6004). It should be noted that whether or not the first reserved storage number is 2 or more can be determined by, for example, checking the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635). . If the first number of pending storages is not 2 or more (that is, if the number of first pending storages is 1), the process is ended as it is.

  In this embodiment, when executing the hold announcement effect, the display of the hold display is started in a normal manner at the time of the start winning, and then the hold display is changed to special hold, blue hold, or red hold at the timing of the hold shift. However, the fact that the first reserved memory number is only 1 at the timing of the start winning is that when the reserved shift of the first reserved memory is performed thereafter, the reserved is immediately exhausted and the variable display is performed. Therefore, there is no room to execute the pending notice production. Therefore, in this embodiment, if the first number of pending storages is 2 or more in step S6004, it is determined that the pending announcement effect cannot be executed, and the processing is ended as it is.

  Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, in the case where the blue hold or the red hold is immediately displayed at the timing of the start winning and the execution of the hold announcement effect can be started, the first hold storage Even if the number is 1, the process may proceed to step S6005 and subsequent steps so that the pending notice effect can be executed.

  Further, for example, in the case of a gaming machine configured to be able to display the active display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed by the display mode that inherits the display mode of the hold display, the active display of the active display after executing the hold notice effect is performed. Since it is possible to change the display mode, it is possible to shift to the processing of step S6005 and execute the pending notice effect even if the first pending storage number is 1.

  If the first number of pending storages is 2 or more, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the latest pending display based on the latest variable category command and the first number of pending storages received (step S6005). . In step S6005, the effect control CPU 101 selects a final display mode determination table for determining the final display mode of the latest pending display based on the latest variable category command and the first number of reserved memories. And CPU101 for production control performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  38 and 39 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the final display mode determination table. As shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the final display mode determination table, as the final display mode of the pending display, normal hold (without special hold), normal hold (with special hold), blue A judgment value is assigned to each of the hold and the red hold. Of these, "normal hold (with special hold)" means that after a change to special hold at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, it finally becomes normal hold at the timing of the subsequent hold shift. Although the final display mode itself is normally on hold, the hold announcement effect is executed. On the other hand, "normal hold (no special hold)" means that it does not change to special hold at all and does not change to normal hold until the hold is exhausted and the hold display is erased. It corresponds to the one that does not execute the performance itself.

  In addition, when the first hold storage number is 2, since there is only one opportunity to change the hold display at the timing of the hold shift after the start winning, there is room to temporarily change the hold display to the special hold. Absent. Therefore, in the final display mode determination table for the first number of held memories “2” shown in FIGS. 38 (A) to (C), only for normal hold (no special hold), blue hold, and red hold. , The judgment value is assigned to each, and the judgment value is not assigned to the normal hold (with special hold).

  In the case where the hold display can be changed a plurality of times during one variable display or the active display can be displayed, even when the first hold storage number is 2, The special hold may be displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, when the variation category indicated by the variation category command is non-reach, super-reach or super-reach jackpot, the pending notice effect can be executed. When it is configured and the variation category indicated by the variation category command is another variation category, the effect control CPU 101 directly sets the final display mode of the suspension display to “normal suspension (without special suspension)”. Then, it is decided not to execute the pending notice effect.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the variation category indicated by the variation category command is not If it indicates a reach gap (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode determination table for two held and non-reach gaps shown in FIG. 38A is selected, and the variation indicated by the variation category command is selected. If the category indicates out-of-reach (variable category 7 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode determination table for two pending and out-of-reach shown in FIG. 38 (B) is selected, and the variation category command is issued. If the variation category shown is one that indicates a super-reach jackpot (variation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), it is shown in FIG. 38 (C). Hold two and selects a final display mode decision table super reach jackpot. Further, the effect control CPU 101 uses the variable category command when the first number of reserved memories stored in the first reserved memory number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “3” or “4”. If the variation category shown is one that indicates non-reach deviation (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), the final display mode determination table for 3 to 4 reservations and non-reach deviation shown in FIG. 39D is selected. If the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates that the super reach is lost (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), 3 to 4 reservations shown in FIG. 39 (E) and the final display mode for the super reach loss Select the decision table, and the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates super-reach jackpot (variation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17) If, for selecting a final display mode decision table for pending 3-4 and super reach jackpot shown in FIG. 39 (F). And CPU101 for production control performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, when the super-reach is lost or when the super-reach jackpot is hit, compared with the case where the non-reach is lost, the blue hold or the normal hold is finally set. The rate of change to red hold is high. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the hold display finally changes to blue hold or red hold, the expectation level (reach reliability) for the super reach is finally compared with the case where the hold display is finally normal hold. It's getting higher.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39, in this embodiment, when the super-reach jackpot is hit, compared with the case where the non-reach is out or the super-reach is out, finally, it is bluer than the normal hold. The rate of change to hold or red hold is high. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, in this embodiment, in the case of a super-reach jackpot, compared with the case of non-reach loss or super-reach loss, the red color is finally reddish rather than the blue hold color. The rate of change to hold is higher. Therefore, in this embodiment, the expectation (big hit reliability) for the big hit is highest when the notice display of the notice subject is finally changed to red hold, and the next big hit is finally changed to blue hold. Has a high expectation (big hit reliability), and the final expectation for big hits (big hit reliability) is lowest when the game is normally held.

  Note that, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 38 and 39, a case where the preliminary announcement effect can be executed when the winning determination result is non-reach, super-reach, or super-reach jackpot is possible. Although shown, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, if there is a variation category that can be identified as being a normal reach, the pending notice effect may be configured to be executed based on the winning determination result being out of the normal reach or a normal reach jackpot.

  When it is determined not to execute the hold announcement effect (N in step S6006), that is, when the final display mode is set to normal hold (no special hold), the variable category indicates super-reach deviation or super-reach jackpot. If not, the process is terminated as it is. When it is decided to execute the pending notice effect (Y in step S6006), the effect control CPU 101 displays the pending notice of the notice subject based on the latest variable category command, the first pending storage number, and the final display mode received. Change pattern is determined (step S6007). In step S6007, the effect control CPU 101 selects the change pattern determination table for determining the change pattern of the notice display of the pending display based on the latest variation category command, the first pending storage count, and the final display mode. And CPU101 for production control performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected change pattern determination table, and determines the change pattern of the pending display of a notice object.

  40 and 41 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the change pattern determination table. In FIGS. 40 and 41, the special Δ indicates a special hold for triangle display, and the special □ indicates a special hold for rectangle display.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is “2”, the effect control CPU 101 determines that the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue. If it is a hold, the change pattern determination table for two hold and blue hold shown in FIG. 40 (A) is selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is a red hold, it is shown in FIG. 40 (B). A change pattern determination table for two reservations and red reservation is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, in the change pattern determination table for two reservations and for blue reservation, the determination value is assigned so that the change pattern 21 is determined with a probability of 100%. Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (B), in the change pattern determination table for two reservations and for red reservation, determination values are assigned so that the change pattern 22 is determined with a probability of 100%. The change pattern 21 is a change pattern in which the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as the normal notice at the time of the start winning and then the notice subject hold display is changed to the blue notice at the timing of the hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 22 is a change pattern in which the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as the normal notice at the time of the start winning, and then the notice subject hold display is changed to the red notice at the timing of the hold shift. That is, when the number of first hold storages is “2”, since the timing of the hold shift is only once, the blue hold or the red hold of the final display mode is directly held at the hold shift timing without passing through the special hold. Change to.

  If the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is "3", the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. Is a normal hold (there is a special hold), the three hold patterns shown in FIG. 40C and the change pattern determination table for the normal hold are selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is the blue hold. 40D, the three hold patterns shown in FIG. 40D are selected and the change pattern determination table for blue hold is selected, and if the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red hold, three hold patterns shown in FIG. Select the change pattern determination table for red hold.

  As shown in FIG. 40C, in the change pattern determination table for the three hold patterns and the normal hold pattern, the determination values are assigned to the change pattern 31 and the change pattern 32, respectively. The change pattern 31 is such that the notice display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the notice display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing. Further, the change pattern 32 is such that the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as the normal notice at the time of winning the start prize, and then the notice display of the notice subject is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the shift timing.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 40D, the determination values are assigned to the change patterns 33 and 34 in the change pattern determination table for three reservations and blue reservation. The change pattern 33 is such that after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the time of starting winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the change display of the second hold shift is displayed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 34 is such that the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as the normal notice at the time of the start winning, and then the notice display of the notice subject is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing of the shift.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 40 (E), the determination values are assigned to the change patterns 35 and 36 in the change pattern determination table for three reservations and red reservation. The change pattern 35 is such that after displaying the hold display of the notice target in the normal hold at the time of the start winning, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the change display of the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern that changes the hold display of the notice target to red hold at the timing. In addition, the change pattern 36 is such that the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as the normal notice at the time of winning the start, and then the notice display of the notice subject is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern for changing the hold display of the notice target to red hold at the timing of the shift.

  When the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is "4", the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode determined in step S6005. 41 is normal hold (with special hold), if the four hold patterns and the change pattern determination table for normal hold shown in FIG. 41 (F) are selected and the final display mode determined in step S6005 is blue hold , And the change pattern determination table for holding four blue and holding colors shown in FIG. 41G is selected. If the final display mode determined in step S6005 is red suspension, the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates non-reach or super-reach (variation category 1 or variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16). 41H, the change pattern determination table for four holding and non-reach / super-reach / red-holding shown in FIG. If it is one (variation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), the change pattern determination table for four holdings, super-reach jackpot, and red holding shown in FIG. 41 (I) is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 41F, in the change pattern determination table for four reservations and for normal reservation, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 401, the change pattern 402, the change pattern 403, and the change pattern 404, respectively. ing. The change pattern 401 is such that the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the change display of the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is changed to the normal hold again at the timing, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold as it is at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 402 is such that the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the notice display of the hold display is displayed as it is as the special hold of the triangle display at the shift timing, and the notice display of the hold display is changed to the normal hold again at the third hold shift timing. Further, the change pattern 403 is such that the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as the normal notice at the time of winning the start prize, and then the notice display of the notice subject is changed to the special notice of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the notice display on hold is changed to normal hold again at the shift timing, and the notice display on hold is displayed as normal hold at the third hold shift timing. Further, the change pattern 404 is such that the notice display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the notice display of the notice display is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the notice display is displayed as the special display of the rectangular display as it is at the shift timing, and the notice display is changed to the normal display again at the third hold shift timing.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 41G, in the change pattern determination table for four reservations and blue reservation, the determination values for the change pattern 405, the change pattern 406, the change pattern 407, and the change pattern 408 are respectively determined. Allocated In the change pattern 405, the notice display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start, and then the notice display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the reserved display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue hold as it is at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 406 is such that the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the notice display is displayed in the special hold of the triangle display as it is at the shift timing, and the notice display is changed to blue hold at the third hold shift timing. In addition, the change pattern 407 is such that the notice display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and then the notice display of the notice display is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the reservation display of the notice target is changed to blue hold at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is displayed in the blue hold as it is at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 408 is such that the notice display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the notice display of the notice display is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the reserved display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the shift, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to the blue hold at the timing of the third hold shift.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), four hold and non-reach / super-reach and red hold change pattern determination tables, and four hold, super-reach jackpots and red hold In the change pattern determination table, determination values are assigned to the change pattern 409, the change pattern 410, the change pattern 411, the change pattern 412, the change pattern 413, and the change pattern 414, respectively.

  The change pattern 409 is such that the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of starting winning, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the change display of the second hold shift is performed. This is a change pattern in which the notice display is changed to red notice at the timing, and the notice subject is displayed as red as it is at the third hold shift timing. In addition, the change pattern 410 is such that the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the hold display of the notice target is displayed as it is in the special hold of the triangle display at the shift timing, and the hold display of the notice target is changed to red hold at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 411 is such that the notice display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of the start winning, and then the notice display of the notice display is changed to the special hold of the triangle display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the notice display of the notice display is again displayed as the normal hold at the timing of the shift, and the notice display of the notice display is changed to the red display at the timing of the third hold shift. In addition, the change pattern 412 is such that the hold display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and then the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the notice display is changed to red hold at the shift timing, and the notice display is displayed as red hold at the third hold shift timing. In addition, the change pattern 413 is that after displaying the hold display of the notice target as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, the hold display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift, and the second hold is performed. This is a change pattern in which the notice display is displayed in the special display of the rectangular display as it is at the shift timing, and the notice display is changed to red hold at the third hold shift timing. Further, the change pattern 414 is such that the notice display of the notice target is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and then the notice display of the notice target is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display at the timing of the first hold shift. This is a change pattern in which the notice display of the notice display is again displayed as the normal hold at the timing of the shift, and the notice display of the notice display is changed to the red display at the timing of the third hold shift.

  As shown in FIG. 41, in the present embodiment, when the first number of held memories is "4", the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as normal hold at the time of winning the start prize, and the timing of the first hold shift. It is configured to be changed to a special hold, and can be changed to a normal hold, a blue hold, and a red hold at the timing of the third and subsequent hold shifts. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the notice display of the hold display is displayed at the fourth position (the state after the start winning) and is displayed at the third position in the first hold storage display section 9a. When it is (state after the first hold shift), the notice display of the notice is not changed from the special hold to the normal hold, the blue hold, and the red hold. In addition, as shown in FIGS. 40C to 40E, in this embodiment, even when the first number of held memories is "3", the notice display of the notice subject is displayed as the normal hold at the time of winning the start prize. Therefore, when the notice display for the notice is displayed at the third position on the first hold memory display section 9a (the state after the start winning), the notice display for the notice is changed from the special hold to the normal hold. It does not change to blue hold and red hold. Therefore, in this embodiment, during the period in which the notice display is displayed at the fourth and third positions, the notice display is unlikely to change from special hold to normal hold. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being discouraged by changing from the special hold to the normal hold at an early stage of the hold display of the notice object, and to prevent a reduction in the effect when the hold notice effect is executed. .

  Not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, the special hold, the blue hold, or the red hold can be displayed immediately at the time of winning the start prize, or without waiting for the next hold shift after displaying the special hold. Immediately execute the action effect described later to change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold, so that the hold display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth or third position. Even during the period during which the notice is displayed, the notice display may be changed from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold. However, even when configured in this manner, at least the notice display for the notice is changed from the special notice to the normal notice during the period in which the notice display for the notice notice is displayed at the fourth or third position. It is preferable that the rate of change is low.

  Further, in this embodiment, the action effect described later can be executed at the timing of the hold shift after the special hold is displayed, and the hold display of the notice target does not change to the special hold even if the action effect is executed. Or, it may change to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. For example, in the change patterns 401 and 403 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift to change from the special hold. It can be changed to normal hold. Further, for example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 shown in FIG. 41 (F), after the special hold is displayed at the timing of the first hold shift, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift. The special hold does not change and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift, and the special hold can be changed to the normal hold. As such, in the present embodiment, not only the case where the special hold is returned to the normal hold by one action effect, but also the plurality of action effects are executed and the special hold is sometimes returned to the normal hold. It is possible to improve the effect of performing the pending notice effect.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 40 (C) to (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to (I), in this embodiment, there are two types of special suspension, that is, the special suspension of triangular display and the special suspension of rectangular display. However, when the special hold in the rectangular display is displayed, the proportion of the red hold displayed as the final display mode is higher than that in the case where the special hold in the triangular display is displayed. . On the contrary, when the special hold of the triangular display is displayed, the ratio of returning to the normal hold as the final display mode is higher than that of the special hold of the rectangular display.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 41H and 41I, in this embodiment, even if the special hold is returned to the normal hold, the red hold is finally displayed (that is, it is discouraged that the normal hold is once returned. A change pattern (change patterns 411, 414) is provided after which the red hold is restored and displayed as if it was displayed. Only when the super-reach jackpot is reached, the change patterns 411, 414 of the return pattern are changed. Judgment values are assigned so that they can be determined. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the red suspension is finally returned after returning from the special suspension to the normal suspension, the jackpot is fixed, and more than when the special suspension is changed to the red suspension. , The expectation (reliability) for big hits is high.

  It should be noted that the change patterns 411 and 414 of the revival pattern are not limited to those of which the big hit is fixed, and the change patterns 411 and 414 of the revival pattern can be determined with a low probability even when the super reach is lost. May be. At least, even with such a configuration, when the red hold is finally returned after returning from the special hold to the normal hold, the jackpot against the big hit is more than that when the special hold is changed to the red hold. Anything that has high expectations (reliability) may be used.

  Further, in this embodiment, the case where the change patterns 411 and 414 of the revival pattern are provided only when the final display mode is the red hold is shown, but the same recovery is performed when the final display mode is the blue hold. You may comprise so that the change pattern of a pattern may be provided.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 41 (H) and 41 (I), the winning determination result is non-reach / super-reach or super-reach big hit only when the number of reservations changes to 4 and red. Although the case where different change pattern determination tables are used depending on whether or not is shown, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect. For example, a change pattern determination table for two reservations and three reservations shown in FIGS. 40A to 40E, or four reservations shown in FIGS. 41F and 41G for normal reservation or blue reservation. The change pattern determination table may also be configured to use a different change pattern determination table depending on the winning determination result. In this case, for example, when the change pattern of the revival pattern is provided even when the final display mode is blue hold as described above, the non-reach / super is released by a mode similar to FIGS. 41H and 41I. It is configured to provide a change pattern determination table for out-of-reach and a change pattern determination table for super-reach jackpot, and when it finally returns to blue hold from special hold, it finally becomes a big hit. It may be configured such that it is determined that the probability of winning is high or the expectation (reliability) for the big hit is high.

  Further, the change pattern determination table for non-reach deviation and the change pattern determination table for super-reach deviation may be separately provided by further subdividing.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 41 (H), as a change pattern determination table for four reservations and red reservations, a common table is used when non-reach is lost and when super-reach is lost. However, different change pattern determination tables may be used for non-reach and super-reach.

  Moreover, the example of the change patterns shown in FIGS. 40 and 41 is an example, and various change patterns may be provided. For example, in the example shown in FIGS. 40 and 41, the case where the normal hold is changed to the special hold at the timing of the first hold shift is shown, but the special hold is displayed from the timing of the start winning or the second and subsequent times. A change pattern for changing from normal hold to special hold at the timing of the hold shift may be provided. Further, for example, a change pattern in which the color is changed to blue hold and then to red hold may be provided.

  In addition, in FIGS. 40 and 41, the case where only the change pattern in which the special hold of either the triangular display or the rectangular display is displayed is shown, but for example, the special hold of the triangular display is changed to the special hold of the rectangular display. Alternatively, a change pattern for changing from a rectangular display special hold to a triangular display special hold may be provided.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 stores the final display mode and the change pattern determined in steps S6005 and S6007 in the pending announcement effect setting information storage area provided in the RAM in association with the pending storage of the announcement target (step). S6008). In addition, in this embodiment, the pending notice effect can be executed in parallel with respect to the plurality of pending displays displayed on the first pending storage display unit 9a, and the first pending storage display unit 9a can display the pending announcement effect at the maximum. Since four hold displays can be displayed, four storage areas are provided in the hold advance notice effect setting information storage area, and the final display mode and the change pattern are stored in association with the respective hold memories. .

  FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the variation pattern command reception waiting process, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S811). If the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is set, the fluctuation pattern command reception flag is reset (step S812). Then, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the effect design variation start process (step S801) (step S813).

  43 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation start process (step S801) in the effect control process process shown in FIG. In the effect symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 101 first reads a variation pattern command from the variation pattern command storage area (step S8000). Next, the effect control CPU 101 displays the effect design display result (stop) according to the variation pattern command read in step S8000 and the data stored in the display result specification command storage area (that is, the received display result specification command). (Symbol) is determined (step S8001). When the pseudo pattern is specified by the variation pattern command, the effect control CPU 101 determines in step S8001 that a chance eye symbol (for example, "223" or "445") as a temporary stop symbol in the pseudo sequence. , Which is a combination of a big hit symbol that does not reach and a symbol that is offset by one symbol) are also determined. The effect control CPU 101 stores data indicating the determined stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect symbol display result storage area.

  FIG. 44 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a stop symbol of the effect symbol in the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 44, when the received display result designation command indicates “normal big hit” (when the received display result designation command is the display result 2 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 stops. As a design, the combination of the effect designs in which the three designs have the same even number is determined. Moreover, when the received display result designation command indicates "probability variation big hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 3 designation command), the effect control CPU 101 determines that the three symbols are the stop symbols. A combination of effect symbols arranged in the same odd number symbol is determined.

  Further, when the received display result designation command indicates "sudden probability big hit" or "small hit" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 4 designation command or the display result 5 designation command), The effect control CPU 101 determines a combination of effect symbols such as "135" as a stop symbol. Then, in the case of "disappearance" (when the received display result designation command is the display result 1 designation command), a combination of effect symbols other than the above is determined. However, when the reach effect is involved, a combination of effect symbols having two left and right symbols is determined. Also, the combination of the three symbols derived and displayed on the effect display device 9 is the "stop symbol" of the effect symbol.

  The production control CPU 101, for example, extracts a random number for determining the stop symbol, and uses the stop symbol determination table in which the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols and the numerical values are associated with each other, the stop symbol of the effect symbol decide. That is, the stop symbol is determined by selecting the data indicating the combination of the effect symbols corresponding to the numerical values that match the extracted random numbers.

  As for the effect symbols, a stop symbol that reminds of a big hit (a combination of symbols in which the left, middle and right sides are all the same symbol) is called a big hit symbol. In addition, a stop design that reminds the user of disengagement is called a disengagement design. In addition, a symbol (in this embodiment, an odd symbol) that evokes a probability variation state is also called a probability variation symbol, and a symbol (in this embodiment, an even symbol) that evokes that the probability variation state does not occur is a non-certain variation symbol. Also called.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the probability variation state flag or the time saving state flag is set (step S8002). If neither the probability variation state flag nor the time saving state flag is set (that is, in the normal state), the effect control CPU 101 checks whether or not the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set ( Step S8003). If the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is set (that is, if the variation display of the first special symbol is started), the process proceeds to step S8004. That is, in the present embodiment, as already described, when the game state is the normal state, the pending notice effect is executed for the first pending storage, so the processes of steps S8002 and S8003 are executed. As a result, only when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed when the game state is the normal state, the processing of steps S8004 to S8010 is executed to change the notice display to the hold display and the special hold, It is configured to be able to execute action productions.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not there is a special hold display timing in the first hold storage (step S8004). Whether or not there is a display timing of special suspension is confirmed by, for example, the change pattern stored in the suspension notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), and the change start (suspension of this time) It can be judged by checking whether there is a normal hold → special △ or special □ at the timing of (shift). If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display having the special hold display timing to the special hold on the first hold storage display unit 9a (step S8005). . In this case, if the change pattern is normal hold → special Δ, it is changed to triangle special hold, and if it is normal hold → special □, it is changed to rectangular special hold.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 becomes an executable timing of the effect effect (effect that is executed in a manner that acts on the hold display and suggests that the display mode of the hold display changes) in the first hold storage. It is confirmed whether or not there is any (step S8006). It should be noted that whether or not it is the executable timing of the action effect is confirmed by, for example, confirming the change pattern stored in the suspension notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008) to determine whether the current variation start (suspend shift) has occurred. Special △ → Special △ or Special △ → Normal hold, Special △ → Blue hold, Special △ → Red hold, Special □ → Special □, Special □ → Normal hold, Special □ → Blue hold, Special □ → Red hold It can be determined by confirming whether or not

  The execution timing of the action effect is not limited to that shown in this embodiment, and the action effect may be executed at another timing. For example, when the normal hold is changed to the special hold, the action effect may be determined to be executable and the processing from step S8007 may be performed to execute the action effect. In addition, for example, it may be configured to provide a special action effect when changing from the normal hold to the special hold, and when the special action effect does not change to the special hold (gase action effect) May be configured so that there is.

  If there is a timing at which the action effect can be executed in the first hold memory, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display as an action effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the action effect. A table according to the mode is selected (step S8007). Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the selected effect effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on a random number to determine the presence and type of the effect effect (step S8008).

  In addition, in this embodiment, since the pending notice effect can be executed in parallel with respect to the plurality of pending displays displayed on the first pending storage display unit 9a, the action effect is stored in the first pending memory. It may happen that there are multiple executables at the same time. In this case, the effect control CPU 101 determines the presence or absence and the type of the effect effect in priority from the first variable storage in which the variable display is started first in the first hold storage at which the effect effect can be executed. Thus, the action effect is controlled to be executed only once during one variation display. For example, when the first and third hold displays displayed on the first hold storage display unit 9a are the executable timing of the action effect, the first hold display is acted on first. When the presence and type of the effect are determined, and when it is decided to execute the effect effect, the effect effect is executed only for the first hold display.

  It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and, for example, the effect may be performed a plurality of times during one variable display by executing the effect by shifting the time. Further, the action effect is executed only once during one variable display, but the action effect is executed in such a manner that the one action effect simultaneously acts on a plurality of hold displays. Good.

  45 and 46 are explanatory diagrams showing specific examples of the action effect determination table. The effect control CPU 101 selects the special Δ → normal hold action effect determination table shown in FIG. 45 (A) at the timing of changing from the special hold of the triangle display to the normal hold based on the change pattern. Further, if it is the timing to change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the normal hold, the action production determination table for special □ → normal hold shown in FIG. 45 (B) is selected. Further, at the timing when the special hold of the triangular display does not change and the special hold of the triangular display remains unchanged, the action effect determination table for special Δ → special Δ shown in FIG. 45C is selected. Further, at the timing when the special display of the rectangular display does not change to the special display of the rectangular display as it is, the action production determination table for special □ → special □ shown in FIG. 45D is selected. Further, if it is the timing of changing from the special hold of the triangular display to the blue hold, the action effect determination table for special Δ → blue hold shown in FIG. 46 (E) is selected. Further, if it is the timing to change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the blue hold, the action effect determination table for special □ → blue hold shown in FIG. 46 (F) is selected. Further, if it is the timing to change from the special hold of the triangle display to the red hold, the action effect determination table for special Δ → red hold shown in FIG. 46 (G) is selected. Further, if it is the timing to change from the special hold of the rectangular display to the red hold, the action effect determination table for special □ → red hold shown in FIG. 46 (H) is selected.

  As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in the action effect determination table, determination values are assigned to no action effect, action effect A, action effect B, and action effect C, respectively. In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are three types of action effects A to C as the types of action effects is shown, but not limited to such a mode, for example, only two types of action effects are used. It may be configured or configured to use four or more types of action effects.

  As shown in FIGS. 45 and 46, in this embodiment, when the effect A is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of change from the special hold to the normal hold is high. Further, when the action effect B is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the ratio of the special hold without change is high. Further, when the effect C is executed, the determination value is assigned such that the rate of change from special hold to blue hold or red hold is high.

  The action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45 (A) and 45 (B) are tables used when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, and the pattern of lowering the display mode of the hold display to one with low expectation. It can be said that the table is a table for selecting the effect, but since the selection ratio of the effect effect A is particularly high, the effect effect A is the effect effect of the pattern in which the display mode of the hold display is lowered to a low expectation. You can say (Pattern 1). In addition, the action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 45C and 45D are tables used when the special hold is not changed, and are tables for selecting a pattern for maintaining the current state of the hold display. However, since the selection ratio of the action effect B is particularly high, it can be said that the action effect B is the action effect of the pattern that maintains the display mode of the hold display as it is (pattern 2). In addition, the action effect determination tables shown in FIGS. 46E to 46H are tables used when changing from special hold to blue hold or red hold, and the display mode of the hold display has high expectation. It can be said that it is a table for selecting a pattern to be realized, and since the selection ratio of the action effect C is particularly high, the action effect C has a pattern in which the display mode of the hold display has a high expectation. (Pattern 3).

  Further, since the above-mentioned pattern 1 and pattern 2 are for reducing the display mode of the hold display or maintaining the current state, it is a pattern for making a change failure appear as an action effect, and the pattern 3 is for displaying the hold display. This is a pattern for making the change look successful because it creates the mode. It should be noted that even in the case of the patterns for making the same change failure appear, the manner of showing the action effect may be different between the pattern 1 and the pattern 2. For example, when the action effect according to the above-mentioned pattern 1 is executed, the characters such as "Failure" are displayed, and when the action effect according to the above-mentioned pattern 2 is executed, the characters such as "Failure" are displayed. You may display and make it different.

  Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in the case where the presence / absence of action effect and the determination rate of the type are changed according to which display mode the hold display changes in this time variable display. However, it is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, regardless of the change mode of the variable display this time, the presence / absence of the action effect and the determination rate of the type may be changed according to which final display mode the pending display changes.

  Further, for example, the determination rate of presence / absence and type of action effect may be changed according to the display result (for example, whether or not it is a big hit) and the variation category (for example, presence / absence and type of reach) of the notice target. You may comprise.

  Further, for example, in the case where the display mode of the hold display may be changed from blue hold to red hold, it is possible to execute the effect even when the variable display of this time remains blue hold. You may.

  Further, as described above, even when the display mode of the hold display may be changed from the blue hold to the red hold in some cases, even if the same special hold is changed to the blue hold in the present variable display. The execution ratio and the type of action effect may be changed depending on whether the final display mode is blue hold or red hold. For example, the effect display may be executed at a higher rate when the final display mode is red hold, or the effect effect having a higher degree of expectation (eg, effect effect C) may be executed. Alternatively, conversely, the effect display may be executed at a higher rate when the final display mode is blue hold, or the effect effect having a high degree of expectation (for example, effect effect C) may be executed. . With such a configuration, it is possible not only to give an expectation whether or not the display mode of the hold display changes in the variable display executed this time, but whether the display mode of the hold display may change thereafter. On the other hand, you can have a sense of expectation.

  When it is determined to execute the action effect (Y in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of action effect determined in step S8008 (step S8010). . Then, the process proceeds to step S8012.

  On the other hand, if the probability variation state flag or the time saving state flag is set (Y in step S8002), if the first symbol variation designation command reception flag is not set (N in step S8003), in the first pending storage If there is no action effect executable timing (N in step S8006) or if it is decided not to execute the action effect (N in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 changes the A normal process table (process table without action effect) corresponding to the pattern is selected (step S8011). Then, the process proceeds to step S8012.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer in the process data 1 of the process table selected in steps S8010 and S8011 (step S8012).

  FIG. 47 is an explanatory diagram showing a configuration example of the process table. The process table is a table in which process data that the production control CPU 101 refers to when performing control of the production device is set. That is, the effect control CPU 101 controls the effect display devices (effect parts) such as the effect display device 9 according to the process data set in the process table. The process table is composed of data in which a plurality of combinations of process timer set values, display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data are collected. In the display control execution data, data and the like indicating the form of each variation forming the variation mode during the variable display time (variation time) of the variable display of effect symbols are described. Specifically, the data related to the change of the display screen of the effect display device 9 is described. Further, the process timer set value is set with the change time in the form of the change. The effect control CPU 101 refers to the process table, and performs control to display effect symbols in a variation mode set in the display control execution data only for the time set in the process timer set value.

  The process table shown in FIG. 47 is stored in the ROM of the effect control board 80. The process table is prepared according to each variation pattern.

  In the process table used when performing effect control for a variation pattern involving reach effect, the left symbol is stopped and displayed when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of variation, and the right symbol is stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. Process data indicating display is set. It should be noted that, instead of setting the symbols to be stopped and displayed in the process table, the images for displaying the symbols are synthesized and generated according to the determined stop symbols, the temporary stop symbols in the pseudo-relation and the sliding effect. May be.

  Further, during the variable display of the effect symbol, a notice effect other than the look-ahead notice effect (in this example, the hold notice effect) (so-called notice effect for the change) may be configured to be executable. When it is determined to execute the effect, the effect control CPU 101 selects the process table corresponding to the determined notice effect in steps S8010 and S8011.

  In addition, the effect control CPU 101, according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1), an effect device (effect display device 9 as effect parts, effect parts as effect parts). The control of the various lamps and the speaker 27) as an effect part is executed (step S8013). For example, a command is output to the VDP 109 to display an image according to the variation pattern on the effect display device 9. In addition, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35 in order to control turning on / off of various lamps. Further, a control signal (sound number data) is output to the sound output board 70 in order to output sound from the speaker 27.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 controls so that the effect pattern is variably displayed by the change pattern corresponding to the change pattern command in a one-to-one manner. However, the effect control CPU 101 controls the change pattern command. The variation pattern to be used may be selected from a plurality of types of variation patterns corresponding to.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation pattern command in the fluctuation time timer (step S8014).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101, the command at the time of winning the start stored in the storage area of the command storage area at the time of starting winning (a symbol designating command, a variation category command, and a reserved storage number addition designating command (the first reserved storage number addition) One of the designated command or the second reserved storage number addition designation command)), the one command at the time of the start winning a prize stored in the first storage region is deleted, and the contents of the command storing region at the time of the start winning a prize are shifted ( Step S8015).

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag to a value corresponding to the effect during the process of changing the effect design (step S802) (step S8016).

  FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing the effect of the effect of changing the effect design (step S802) in the effect control process. In the effect symbol changing process, the effect control CPU 101 first subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S8101) and also subtracts 1 from the value of the variable time timer (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether the effect effect is being executed and the effect effect end timing is reached (step S8106). It should be noted that whether or not it is the end timing of the effect production can be specifically determined by checking the value of the fluctuation time timer set in step S8014. If it is the end timing of the action effect, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the notice display of the notice display is held in blue based on the change pattern stored in the hold notice production setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is confirmed whether or not it is the timing to change to red hold (step S8107). If it is the timing to change to blue hold or red hold, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice target to blue hold or red hold. Perform (step S8108).

  If it is not the time to change to the blue hold or the red hold, the effect control CPU 101 displays the advance notification target hold display based on the change pattern stored in the hold advance notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008). It is confirmed whether or not is the timing to change to the normal hold (step S8109). If it is the timing to change to the normal hold, the effect control CPU 101 controls the first hold storage display unit 9a to change the display mode of the hold display of the notice target to the normal hold (step S8110).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101, based on the change pattern stored in the pending notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), even if it is not the end timing of the effect effect, in the other pending storage. It is confirmed whether or not there is a timing to change to blue hold or red hold (step S8111). Then, if there is a timing to change to blue hold or red hold (Y in step S8111), the effect control CPU 101 displays the notice display of the notice display on the first hold memory display section 9a. Is controlled to hold blue or hold red (step S8112). That is, in this embodiment, it may be decided not to execute the action effect even in the variable display at the timing of changing from the special hold to the blue hold or the red hold (see steps S8008 and S8009). ), Even when the action effect is not executed, control is performed to change to blue hold or red hold for the hold display at the timing of changing from special hold to blue hold or red hold.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101, based on the change pattern stored in the pending notice effect setting information storage area (see step S6008), even if it is not the end timing of the effect effect, in the other pending storage. It is confirmed whether or not there is a timing to change to the normal hold (step S8113). Then, if there is a change timing to the normal hold (Y in step S8113), the effect control CPU 101 normally holds the display mode of the hold display of the notice target in the first hold storage display unit 9a. Control to change to (step S8114). That is, in this embodiment, it may be determined that the action effect is not executed even with the variable display at the timing of changing from the special hold to the normal hold (see steps S8008 and S8009). Even when the effect is not executed, control is performed to change the hold display, which is the timing for changing from special hold to normal hold, to normal hold.

  Then, if the variation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect design variation stop processing (step S803) (step S8116).

  FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol fluctuation stop process (step S803) in the effect control process process. In the effect symbol variation stop process, the effect control CPU 101 first confirms whether or not a stop symbol display flag indicating that the effect symbol stop symbol is displayed is set (step S8301). If the stop symbol display flag is set, it moves to step S8305. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the effect symbol, the stop symbol display flag is set in step S8304. Then, the stop symbol display flag is reset when the fanfare effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag is set means that the jackpot symbol has been stopped and displayed but the fanfare production has not yet been executed, so the process for displaying the stop symbol of the effect symbol in step S8302 is executed. No, the process moves to step S8305.

  When the stop symbol display flag is not set, the effect control CPU 101 performs control to stop and display the determined stop symbol (delayed symbol, big hit symbol) (step S8302).

  Next, when neither the big hit symbol nor the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S8302 (that is, the off symbol is displayed) (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 proceeds to step S8311. To do.

  When the big hit symbol or the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the process of step S8302 (Y in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the stop symbol display flag (step S8304).

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 confirms whether or not any of the big hit start designation commands have been received (step S8305). Whether or not one of the big hit start designation commands is received is specifically, a flag indicating that the big hit start designation command set in the command analysis process is received (big hit start designation command reception flag), It can be determined by checking whether or not a flag indicating that the small hit / sudden probability sudden change big hit start designation command has been received (small hit / sudden variation sudden big hit start designation command reception flag) is set. If one of the big hit start designation commands is received, the effect control CPU 101 resets the stop symbol display flag (step S8306) and selects the process table according to the fanfare effect (step S8307). When the big hit start designation command reception flag or the small hit / suddenly-variable big hit start designation command reception flag is set, the effect control CPU 101 resets the flag that has been set.

  Then, the effect control CPU 101 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S8308), and the content of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number). According to the data 1 and the movable member control data 1), the control of the effect device (effect display device 9 as effect part, various lamps as effect part, and speaker 27 as effect part) is executed (step S8309). After that, the value of the effect control process flag is updated to a value according to the big hit display process (step S804) (step S8310).

  When it is determined that neither the big hit nor the small hit (N in step S8303), the effect control CPU 101 sets the value of the effect control process flag according to the variation pattern command reception waiting process (step S800). The value is updated (step S8311).

  Next, a specific example of the presentation mode of the pending notice production will be described. FIG. 50 and FIG. 51 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the presentation mode of the pending notice production. Of these, FIG. 50 shows an effect mode of the hold notice effect when the notice display of the notice object is finally changed to red hold. Further, FIG. 51 shows an effect mode of the hold announcement effect when the hold display of the notice target finally returns to the normal hold. In addition, in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the aspect of the effect screen changes in the order of (1), (2), and (3).

  First, with reference to FIG. 50, a description will be given of an effect mode of the hold advance notice effect when the hold display of the advance notice finally changes to red hold. As shown in FIG. 50 (1), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 while the effect display device 9 is performing variable display of the left, right, and right effect symbols. In the present example, it is assumed that a new start winning occurs in the state where the first number of reserved memories is 3 and the number of first reserved memories is increased to 4, and the number of normal reserved is increased by 1 in the first reserved memory display portion 9a. Let it be done. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be red hold and the change pattern 410 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and as shown in FIG. 50 (3), the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9. In the example shown in FIG. 50 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal hold to the triangular display special hold based on the change pattern 410 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 50 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 410, it is determined to execute the action effect, and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (5), action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), a character B appears as the action effect B, and an effect is performed in which the character B throws a ball toward the special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (5), a case where the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 50 (6), even when the action effect B finishes, the pending display of the notice target does not change to the special pending based on the change pattern 410. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 50 (7), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 50 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 410, it is determined to execute the action effect, and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect C (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 50 (8), the action effect C is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), a character C appears as the action effect C, and an effect is performed in which the character C throws a ball toward the special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50 (8), a case where the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 50 (9), at the end timing of the action effect C, the pending display of the notice target changes from the special pending to the red pending based on the change pattern 410 (steps S8107, S8108). reference).

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where the special hold of the triangle display is displayed as the special hold is shown. In 3) to (8), the rectangular special hold is displayed. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 50, the case where red hold is displayed as the final display mode is shown, but when the change pattern for displaying blue hold is displayed as the final display mode, FIG. In 9), the special hold changes to the blue hold.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 51, a description will be given of an effect mode of the hold notice effect when the notice display of the notice object is finally returned to the normal hold. As shown in FIG. 51 (1), it is assumed that a new start winning is generated in the first starting winning opening 13 while the effect display device 9 is performing the variable display of the left, right, and right effect symbols. In the present example, it is assumed that a new start winning occurs in the state where the first number of reserved memories is 3 and the number of first reserved memories is increased to 4, and the number of normal reserved is increased by 1 in the first reserved memory display portion 9a. Let it be done. Further, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold), and the change pattern 402 is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 51 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (3), when the variable display is started, based on the change pattern 402, the hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal hold to the triangle display special hold (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (4), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 51 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, it is determined to execute the action effect, and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (5), action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, and S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), the character B appears as the action effect B, and the effect is such that the character B throws a ball toward the special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (5), a case where the variable display of the effect symbols is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 51 (6), even when the action effect B ends, the pending display of the notice target does not change to the special pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 51 (7), the variable display of the effect symbol is ended on the effect display device 9.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 51 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, it is determined to execute the action effect, and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 51 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), the character A appears as the action effect A, and the effect is such that the character A throws a ball toward the special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 51 (8), the case where the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during the execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 51 (9), at the end timing of the action effect A, the pending display of the notice target changes from the special pending to the normal pending based on the change pattern 402 (steps S8109, S8110). reference).

  In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 51, the case where the special hold of the triangular display is displayed as the special hold is shown. In 3) to (8), the rectangular special hold is displayed.

  In the hold announcement effect shown in FIG. 50 and FIG. 51, the way of showing the effect effect may be changed depending on which display mode the hold display changes (or does not change). For example, if the hold display remains a special hold and does not change, a character display such as "failure" is displayed, or if the hold display changes from special hold to normal hold, a character display such as "Failure" is displayed. When the hold display changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold, characters such as "success" may be displayed.

  In addition, for example, when configuring so that the display mode of the hold display may change from blue hold to red hold, when the hold display changes from blue hold to red hold, a character display such as “success” is displayed. If the hold display is changed from the special hold to the red hold at once, a character display such as “great success” may be displayed.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, it is possible to display the specific display (in this example, the hold display) corresponding to the variable display, and the specific display in the first mode (in this example, the special hold). After displaying, the change effect (in this example, the pending notice effect accompanied by the effect effect) that changes the display mode of the specific display can be executed. In addition, as the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, it is possible to execute an effect in which the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second mode (blue hold or red hold in this example) having a high advantage. In addition, as a change effect, when the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the first mode, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode (in this example, normally). It is possible to execute the effect of changing to (hold). Then, the specific display displayed in the third mode has a lower rate of changing to the second mode than the specific display displayed in the first mode (in this example, as shown in FIGS. There is only a change pattern 411, 414 that can be selected only when the number of first holding memories is 4 at the time of starting winning and a super reach big hit, and there is a change value of the judgment value. The change patterns 31, 32, 401 to 404, which have very few allocations and do not change as usual, have more allocations of the judgment value, and do not change to red suspension after changing from special suspension to normal suspension. It may be one.) Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of performing the change effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display displayed in the third mode has a lower advantage than the specific display displayed in the first mode (in this example, as shown in FIG. 39, special holding When changing from a normal hold to a normal hold (in the case of normal hold (via special hold)), compared to blue hold and red hold, the percentage of super-reach jackpots and super-reach is low, and non-reach is lost. Is high). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of performing the change effect.

  Specifically, the first mode (in this example, special hold) continues to be displayed even if the failure mode action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect, the first mode (in this example, Although there is a possibility that the feeling of expectation for (special hold) may decrease, in this embodiment, since the first mode (special hold in this example) changes to the third mode (normal hold in this example), It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the aspect and prevent a reduction in the effect of the effect when the change effect is executed.

  Further, in this embodiment, the hold display in which the special hold is changed to the normal hold is shown as the “specific display displayed in the third mode”, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, the "specific display displayed according to the third aspect" is configured to include a display that is normally held from the beginning without going through the special hold. Even such a normal hold is treated as a special hold. The ratio of change to blue hold or red hold may be reduced or the advantage may be reduced in comparison.

  As described above, in this embodiment, even when the same normal hold is set, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, the expectation is lower than that in the case where the normal hold is displayed from the beginning, and the advantage is lower. It's getting low.

  In this embodiment, the case where the jackpot expectation and the reach (super reach) expectation are different as the “advantage” is shown. Good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the display mode of the specific display is at least the first mode (in this example, special hold. Normal hold may be used) and the second mode with high advantage (in this example). , Blue hold, red hold). As the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode can be executed, and the change effect is changed according to the execution mode of the executed change effect. After that, it is possible to execute a change effect with a different ratio (in this example, when the effect production is executed in the hold announcement effect, the effect hold is not changed and the effect effect is executed again and the special hold is executed. It is possible to change from blue hold to red hold, but when the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and the special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, the effect effect is not executed thereafter.). Therefore, it is possible to focus on the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

  In this embodiment, when the action effect is executed in the hold announcement effect and the special hold is changed to the blue hold or the red hold, the effect effect is not executed thereafter. However, the action effect may be configured to be executable at a low rate. In this way, "execute change effect at a different ratio after the change effect depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect" means that when the special hold is changed to the blue hold or the red hold, the subsequent action is performed. It also includes those with a low performance rate of performance.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the change effect, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode after displaying the specific display in the first mode, and the executed change effect. According to the execution mode of the change effect, it is possible to execute the change effect in a different effect mode after the change effect (in this example, even if the effect effect is executed in the hold announcement effect, the special hold is not changed. , After that, the action effect is executed again and it is possible to change from special hold to blue hold or red hold, but if the action effect is executed in the hold notice effect and it changes from special hold to blue hold or red hold, then If the effect production is executed in the hold notice production and remains unchanged from the special hold, the effect production is executed again and the blue state is changed from the special hold. There is the case that change to red hold and if changes, many variations of the representation embodiment.). Therefore, it is possible to focus on the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode. Depending on the execution mode, the ratio of which specific display is targeted for performing the change effect after the change effect is different (in the present example, when a plurality of special holds are displayed, the action is performed in the hold advance notice effect). When the effect is executed and the first special hold changes to blue hold or red hold, after that, when the action effect is executed only for the second and subsequent special holds and the hold display changes. However, if there is no change in the first special hold, the effect display is executed for the first special hold and the hold display can be changed). Therefore, it is possible to focus on the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode, and at the same time, a plurality of types of changes can be performed. The effect can be executed (in this example, the effect effects A to C can be executed in the pending notice effect), and depending on the execution mode of the executed change effect, any kind of change effect is performed after the change effect. The ratio of whether or not to execute is different (in the present example, when the effect production B is executed, the ratio of the special hold is not changed and is high, and when the effect is executed after the special hold is not changed. Is often changed to normal hold, blue hold, and red hold, and thus the ratio of action effect A and action effect C is high). Therefore, it is possible to focus on the change effect that is executed first, and it is possible to improve the interest when the change effect is executed.

  In addition, when the effect production is configured to be executable even after the special suspension is changed to the normal suspension, “any type of change production is executed after the change production according to the execution mode of the executed change production”. The "proportion of whether or not to do" may include, for example, one in which an action effect in which the display mode of the hold display does not change in a later-described action effect (an effect effect of Gase) is easily executed.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (special hold in this example), the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second mode (highly advantageous). Then, it is possible to execute the effect of changing to blue hold or red hold), and as the change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode, It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (normal hold in this example). Then, according to the execution mode of the change effect, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode at different ratios (in this example, as shown in FIG. 45 (A), the action effect A is executed in the pending notice effect). If there is a high rate of change from special hold to normal hold). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of performing the change effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, there are a plurality of types of the first mode (in this example, special holding of triangle display and special holding of rectangular display), and as the change effect, the first mode (special holding in this example) After the specific display is displayed by, it is possible to execute the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the second mode (in this example, blue hold or red hold) having a high degree of advantage, and the change effect is the first effect. When the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode after the specific display is displayed according to the mode, it is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (normal hold in this example). Is. Then, the display mode of the specific display is changed to the third mode by a different ratio according to which type of the first mode is displayed (in this example, as shown in FIG. 39C). , When the special hold of the triangle display is displayed, the ratio of change from the special hold to the normal hold is higher than when the special hold of the rectangular display is displayed). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of performing the change effect.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where there are two types of special holdings (triangle display and rectangle display) having different shapes as the plurality of types of first modes has been described. There may be a plurality of types of pending displays (for example, blue and green pending displays) having different numbers. Further, for example, not only the two types of the first mode (normal hold or special hold), but three or more types of the first mode (normal hold or special hold) may be configured.

  Further, according to this embodiment, as the change effect, after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (special hold in this example), the display mode of the specific display is changed to the second mode (highly advantageous). Then, it is possible to execute the effect of changing to blue hold or red hold), and as the change effect, after displaying the specific display in the first mode, the display mode of the specific display is not changed to the second mode, It is possible to execute an effect of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode (normal hold in this example). Then, in the predetermined period, the rate of changing the display mode of the specific display to the third mode is low (in the present example, in the period in which the pending display of the notice target is displayed at the fourth and third positions, It is difficult for the notice display for notice to change from special hold to normal hold. It is possible that the notice display for notice does not change from special hold to normal hold at all.) Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of performing the change effect.

  Further, according to this embodiment, the specific display is displayed as a first mode in a special mode (special suspension in this example) different from the normal mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of performing the change effect.

  In this embodiment, the reddish hold has the highest expectation (reliability) for the big hit, and the blue hold has the next highest expectation (reliability) for the big hit. The expectation level (reliability) for the big hit may be the same as that of the special hold, or the special hold may be configured so that the expectation degree (reliability) for the big hit is higher than that of the normal hold.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the special hold is displayed as the first mode and the normal hold is displayed as the third mode to change from the special hold to the normal hold, but it is limited to such a mode. Absent. For example, the normal hold is displayed in the position of the first mode, and the third mode shows that the display mode of the hold display has already been changed (for example, a circular display including a character display of "Done"). May be configured to be displayed. Hereinafter, a modified example 1 configured to be able to display the completed reservation will be described.

  FIG. 52 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of the presentation mode of the pending notice production in the first modification. In the modified example 1, the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is performed in each of FIGS. 37 to 41, 43, 45 to 46, and 48. In the process and each decision table, it is equivalent to replacing the special hold with the normal hold and replacing the normal hold with the special hold with the completed hold.

  In the first modification shown in FIG. 52 as well, the change patterns that change from the special hold obtained by replacing the change patterns 411 and 414 shown in FIG. The rate of change to hold is lower than the rate of change from normal hold to red hold, and completed hold is less advantageous than normal hold.

  In the modified example 1, as shown in FIG. 52 (1), when the effect display device 9 is performing the variable display of the left, middle, and right effect symbols, a new start winning is generated in the first start winning hole 13. It is assumed that In the example shown in FIG. 52, it is assumed that a new start winning occurs in the state where the first reserved memory number is 3 and the first reserved memory number is increased to 4, and the normal reserved state is displayed in the first reserved memory display portion 9a. It is assumed to have increased by one. In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new pending display is determined to be already reserved, and the change pattern 402 (however, a change pattern that is read as already reserved) is determined as the change pattern. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one hold memory is used up and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 52 (3). However, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (3), when the variable display is started, based on the change pattern 402, the hold display of the notice target does not change to the normal hold. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (4), the variable display of the effect symbols is ended on the effect display device 9.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 52 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, the action effect is determined to be executed, and the effect effect is changed. It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), when the character B appears as the action effect B and the character B throws a ball toward the notice display (normal hold). Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (5), a case where the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in the present example, as shown in FIG. 52 (6), even when the action effect B ends, the notice display pending display does not change to the normal hold based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 52 (7), the variable display of the effect symbols is ended on the effect display device 9.

  Next, one reserved memory is consumed and the reserved displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 52 (8). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, it is determined to execute the action effect, and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 52 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), when the character A appears as the action effect A and the character A throws a ball toward the notice display (normal hold) of the notice target. Is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 52 (8), a case where the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 52 (9), when the end timing of the effect production A comes, the hold display of the notice target changes from normal hold to completed hold based on the change pattern 402 (steps S8109, S8110). reference).

According to the modified example 1 shown in FIG. 52, the specific display is displayed in the normal mode (normal hold) as the first mode. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a reduction in the effect of performing the change effect.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the expression of normal mode (normal hold) is used, but the normal mode (normal hold) is, for example, a display mode of a hold display displayed when the hold notice effect is executed. It is a display mode that is most frequently displayed, and does not suggest the possibility of a big hit or reach, or a display mode that suggests that the possibility is relatively low.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the case of executing the hold announcement effect so that only the hold display can be changed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a mode. For example, in a gaming machine configured to be able to display an active display corresponding to a currently displayed variable display by a display mode that inherits the display mode of the hold display, the hold display is exhausted and the variable display of the notice subject is being executed. Even in the case of, the display mode of the active display may be changeable. That is, the active display may be configured to be changeable as the specific display, not limited to the case where the hold display is configured to be changeable as the specific display. Modification 2 will be described below in which the display mode of the active display is also changeable.

  FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram showing an example of a presentation mode of a pending notice production in the second modification. In the second modification, the processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 100 (specifically, the effect control CPU 101) is performed in each of FIGS. 37 to 41, 43, 45 to 46, and 48. In the process and each decision table, the process to display the active display is added, and the display similar to normal hold, special hold, blue hold, and red hold can be displayed in the active display, and the display mode of the active display is changed. The change pattern may be configured as possible.

  In the modified example 2, as shown in FIG. 53 (1), a start winning is newly generated in the first start winning opening 13 when the effect display device 9 is performing variable display of the left, right, and right effect symbols. It is assumed that In this example, it is assumed that a new start winning occurs in the state where the first reserved memory number is 2 and the first reserved memory number is increased to 3, and the normal reserved number is increased by 1 in the first reserved memory display portion 9a. Let it be done. In addition, it is assumed that the display screen of the effect display device 9 is provided with an active display portion 9F and the active display portion 9F displays an active display corresponding to the variable display currently being executed. In addition, in this example, it is assumed that the final display mode of the new hold display is determined to be normal hold (with special hold), and the change pattern 402 (however, the change pattern in which the active display is also read as changeable) is used as the change pattern. It is decided. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (2), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed, and each hold display is shifted and displayed one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 53 (3). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (3), when the variable display is started, the hold display of the notice target is changed from the normal hold to the triangular display special hold based on the change pattern 402 (see step S8005). Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (4), the variable display of the effect symbols is ended on the effect display device 9.

  Next, one hold memory is consumed and the hold displays are shifted one by one, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9 as shown in FIG. 53 (5). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, it is determined to execute the action effect, and It is assumed that the type is determined to be the action effect B (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (5), the action effect B is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), a character B appears as the action effect B, and an effect is performed in which the character B throws a ball toward the special hold. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (5), a case where the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (6), even when the action effect B ends, the pending display of the notice target does not change to the special pending based on the change pattern 402. Then, based on the end of the variable display time, as shown in FIG. 53 (7), the effect display device 9 ends the variable display of the effect symbols.

  Next, one reserved memory is consumed, and the next variable display is started on the effect display device 9, as shown in FIG. 53 (8). Further, based on the start of the variable display of the notice target, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the active display in the same display mode as the special hold is displayed corresponding to the variable display of the notice target currently being executed. It is displayed on the active display portion 9F. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), when the variable display is started, it is determined that it is the executable timing of the action effect based on the change pattern 402, and it is determined that the action effect is executed and It is assumed that the type of effect is determined to be the effect effect A (see step S8008). Further, based on the determination result, as shown in FIG. 53 (8), the action effect A is executed in the variable display of the effect symbol (see steps S8010, S8013, S8105). In the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), a character A appears as the action effect A, and an effect in which the character A throws a ball toward the active display of the display mode similar to the special hold is executed. The case is shown. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 53 (8), a case where the variable display of the effect symbol is reduced and displayed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9 during execution of the effect effect is shown. Next, in this example, as shown in FIG. 53 (9), at the end timing of the effect production A, the active display of the display mode similar to the special reservation is changed to the display mode similar to the normal reservation based on the change pattern 402. The display changes to active display (see steps S8109 and S8110).

  When blue or blue is selected as the final display mode, the active display may be changed to the active display having the same display mode as the blue hold or the red hold in FIG. 53 (9).

  Further, according to this embodiment, the effect produced by the mode that acts on the specific display displayed by the first mode (in this example, FIG. 50 (5), FIG. 50 (8), and FIG. ), A change effect including an effect effect of the form shown in FIG. 51 (8) can be executed. In addition, the action effect can be executed a plurality of times for the specific display displayed in the first aspect of 1 (in this example, in the change patterns 402 and 404 illustrated in FIG. 41F, the first hold shift is performed. After the special hold is displayed at the timing of, the action effect is executed at the timing of the second hold shift, but the special hold does not change and the action effect is executed at the timing of the third hold shift and the special hold is performed. Can be changed from normal to pending). Therefore, the effect of performing the change effect can be improved.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the change pattern capable of executing the action effect at most twice is provided, but the change pattern capable of executing the action effect at least three times is provided. Good.

  Further, according to this embodiment, when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode is changed to the second mode, the display mode of the specific display displayed in the first mode is changed to the second mode. The advantage is higher than the case of changing (in this example, as shown in FIG. 41, a change pattern (change patterns 411 and 414) is provided in which red hold is finally displayed even after returning from special hold to normal hold. The change patterns 411 and 414 can be determined only when the super reach jackpot is achieved). Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific display displayed in the third mode.

  In addition, in this embodiment, a case where the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold further changes to the red hold as “when the display mode of the specific display displayed in the third mode changes to the second mode” However, the present invention is not limited to such a content, and may be configured such that, for example, the advantage is high even when the hold display that is normally held from the beginning is changed to red hold.

  In addition, in this embodiment, the case where the final display mode and the change pattern of the hold display are determined at the time of the start winning, and then the presence or absence and the type of the action effect are determined for each variable display have been described. I can't stop. For example, without using the change pattern, it is configured to determine the presence or absence and the type of action effect for each variable display and determine whether to change from special hold to normal hold, blue hold, or red hold. May be.

Embodiment 2.
In the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, another hold display is changed from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is consumed. It may be configured to limit the above. The second embodiment for restricting the change from the special hold to the normal hold will be described below.

  In this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configurations and processes as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the pending notice effect setting process (step S800A) in the second embodiment. In this embodiment, in the pending notice effect setting process, in addition to the process shown in the first embodiment, the processes of steps S6009 and S6010 are executed. In step S6009, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the change pattern of the hold display determined in step S6007X is one of the change patterns 401 to 404, 412, 414 (change pattern including change from special hold to normal hold). It is confirmed whether or not (step S6009). If it is one of the change patterns 401 to 404, 412, 414, the effect control CPU 101 sets a restriction flag indicating that the change from special suspension to normal suspension is restricted (step S6010).

  It should be noted that the restriction flag set in step S6010 is, when the hold display changed from the special hold to the normal hold is consumed, when the variable display corresponding to the hold display is started or finished, the effect symbol variation start is started. It is reset in the process and production symbol fluctuation stop process.

  In this embodiment, in the process of step S6005X, the final display mode determination table different from the process of step S6005 shown in the first embodiment is used to determine the final display mode of the hold display (step S6005X). .

  55 and 56 are explanatory diagrams showing a specific example of the final display mode determination table in the second embodiment. However, when the first number of pending storages is 2, the effect control CPU 101 determines the final display mode of the pending display using the final display mode determination table similar to FIGS. 38 (A) to (C). To do.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) is "3" or "4". If the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates non-reach (variation category 1 shown in FIG. 16), if the restriction flag is not set, the hold 3 shown in FIG. ~ 4 and non-reach, and when the final display mode determination table for turning off the restriction flag is selected and the restriction flag is set, 3 to 4 hold and non-reach are shown in FIG. 55D-2. In addition, the final display mode determination table for turning on the restriction flag is selected. If the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates that the reach is out of reach (variation category 7 shown in FIG. 16), if the restriction flag is not set, it is shown in FIG. 55 (E-1). When 3 to 4 reservations are not held and super reach is not reached and the final display mode determination table for restriction flag off is selected and the restriction flag is set, 3 to 4 reservations and supermarket shown in FIG. 55 (E-2) The final display mode determination table for out-of-reach and restriction flag ON is selected. Further, if the variation category indicated by the variation category command indicates a super-reach jackpot (variation categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), if the restriction flag is not set, then FIG. 56 (F-1) When the limit display is determined by selecting the final display mode determination table for holding 3 to 4 holdings and super reach jackpot and turning off the limit flag shown in FIG. 56, holding 3 to 4 holdings shown in FIG. 56 (F-2) Also, the final display mode determination table for super-reach jackpot and restriction flag on is selected. And CPU101 for production control performs the lottery process based on a random number using the selected final display mode determination table, and determines the final display mode of the latest hold display.

  Further, in this embodiment, in the processing of step S6007X, the change pattern of the pending display is determined using a change pattern determination table different from the processing of step S6007 shown in the first embodiment (step S6007X). .

  FIG. 57 is an explanatory diagram showing a specific example of the change pattern determination table according to the second embodiment. However, the effect control CPU 101, for the change pattern determination tables shown in FIGS. 40 (A) to (E) and FIGS. 41 (F) to (H), shows those change patterns shown in the first embodiment. The change pattern of the hold display is determined using a table similar to the determination table.

  In this embodiment, the effect control CPU 101 sets the first reserved storage number stored in the first reserved storage number storage area (see steps S628 and S635) to "4", and indicates the variation indicated by the variation category command. If the category indicates super-reach jackpot (variable categories 23 and 26 shown in FIG. 17), and if red hold is determined as the final display mode, and if the restriction flag is not set, hold 4 Select the change pattern determination table for individual and super-reach jackpots, red hold and limit flag off, and if the limit flag is set, determine 4 hold patterns and change patterns for super-reach jackpot and red hold and limit flag on Select a table.

  As shown in FIGS. 55 and 56, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (that is, when the hold display in which the special hold is changed to the normal hold is displayed), the normal hold ( It has been configured so that it will not be decided). Further, as shown in FIG. 57, in this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set, the change patterns 411 and 414 including the change from the special hold to the normal hold are not determined. . With such a configuration, in this embodiment, when the special hold is changed to the normal hold, another hold display is changed from the special hold to the normal hold until the hold display changed to the normal hold is consumed. There is no limit.

  In this embodiment, when the restriction flag is set (when the hold display that has changed from special hold to normal hold is displayed), another hold display may change from special hold to normal hold. Although the case where the restriction is made so as not to be shown is shown, the present invention is not limited to such a mode, and the restriction may be performed by lowering the rate at which another hold display changes from the special hold to the normal hold.

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the number of specific displays displayed according to the third mode is limited (in this example, when the restriction flag is set (that is, from special suspension to normal suspension). If the hold display changed to No. is displayed), change patterns 411 and 414 including normal hold (with special hold) and change from special hold to normal hold are not determined). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a decrease in interest in the game when the change effect is executed.

Embodiment 3.
In the first embodiment, the case where the hold display is changed to a display mode (blue hold or red hold) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal mode is shown, but the hold display can be changed to a display mode that suggests the effect content. You may comprise. Hereinafter, a third embodiment in which the hold display can be changed to a display mode that suggests the effect contents will be described.

  In this embodiment, detailed description of the parts having the same configurations and processes as those of the first embodiment will be omitted, and the parts different from the first embodiment will be mainly described.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the first pending storage display unit 9a and the second pending storage display unit 9b are provided has been described, but in this embodiment, instead of these, the total pending storage number is displayed. It is assumed that a total pending storage display section is provided. Note that the configuration shown in this embodiment is not limited to the mode shown in this embodiment, and is applied to the gaming machine provided with the first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold storage display section 9b. Good.

  Further, in the first embodiment, the case where the normal big hit, the probability variation big hit, and the sudden probability variation big hit are provided as the big hit types, but in this embodiment, instead of these, 15R probability variation big hit, 8R It is assumed that the probability variation jackpot and the sudden variation jackpot are provided.

  In the present embodiment, as a display mode of the hold display displayed in the combined hold storage display unit, a normal display mode showing the reliability for the 15R / 8R probability variation big hit and a performance suggestion suggesting execution of a predetermined performance And a display mode are provided.

  The normal display modes include "white" displayed in white, "red" displayed in red, and "gold" displayed in gold, and the reliability for a 15R / 8R probability variation big hit. Is gold> red> white.

  In the production suggestion display mode, by displaying the character "special", the first special suggestion mode that suggests that it is a subject of advance notice for the special zone production, and by displaying the character "special?" The second special suggestion mode that suggests that it is the subject of advance notice, the pseudo-link suggestion mode that indicates that the pseudo-link is executed by displaying the character "NEXT", and the character "SP". The SP suggestion mode suggesting that the super reach is developed. The first special suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the special zone effect is foretold, while the second special suggestion mode is selected regardless of whether the special zone effect is foretold. It is a display mode to obtain. The pseudo-relation suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the pseudo-ream mode is executed, and the SP suggestion mode is a display mode that can be selected only when the super reach is developed.

  The special zone effect is an effect of displaying a special background different from the normal background by one change or a plurality of continuous changes. In addition, the special zone effect is configured such that the greater the number of executions, the higher the reliability with respect to the 15R / 8R probability variation big hit. Hereinafter, starting the execution of the special zone effect may be referred to as “rushing into the special zone”. Immediately before entering the special zone, a successful entry effect is executed. The rush success effect is an effect indicating that it is decided to rush into the special zone after suggesting that the user rushes into the special zone (for example, as shown in FIGS. 64 (4) and (5) described later, “special This is a production in which “Success!” Is displayed after displaying “Zone Chance!”. Also, when the player does not rush into the special zone, a rush failure effect may be executed to give the player a sense of expectation by suggesting that the player will enter the special zone. For example, similar to the successful entry effect, after suggesting to enter the special zone, an effect indicating not to enter the special zone (for example, "Special zone chance!" Is displayed and then "Failure ..." is displayed. (Production) can be executed as a rush failure production. Hereinafter, the successful entry effect and the unsuccessful entry effect may be collectively referred to as "advance announcement effect". The rush advance notice effect is an effect that is performed for 3 seconds from the start of fluctuation. When entering the special zone, the special zone effect is started 3 seconds after the start of fluctuation (at the end of the successful entry effect). In addition, when the variation time of the variation for performing the in-rush announcement effect is shorter than 3 seconds, the in-rush announcement effect is forcibly ended one second before the variation is stopped. At that time, when the player enters the special zone, the successful player effect is forcibly ended and the special zone effect is started.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the total pending storage display section displays a pending display for the pending storage that has not yet been changed, and displays the variable display for the pending storage from the start to the end. The hold display for the hold storage is continuously displayed on the active display unit different from the total hold storage display unit. That is, on the active display unit, an active display (variable display corresponding image) corresponding to the variable display being executed is displayed. The active display is an image showing the degree of reliability with respect to the occurrence of a big hit based on fluctuations during execution. As the display mode of the active display, the same display mode as the above-described hold display (“white”, “red”, “gold” which are normal display modes, the first special suggestion mode and the second special suggestion display mode) The suggestion mode, the pseudo-link mode, and the SP suggestion mode) are provided.

  In the present embodiment, the display mode of displaying the hold display and the active display is determined when the corresponding hold storage occurs (at the time of starting winning). Specifically, when the start winning is generated, first, the change mode of the normal display mode (holding change pattern and change timing described later) is determined, and then it is determined whether or not to display in the effect suggestion display mode. To do. When it is determined not to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the hold display is started in the normal display mode from the timing of the start winning. Further, when it is determined to display in the effect suggestion display mode, the display of the hold display is started in the effect suggestion display mode from the timing of the start winning, and when the effect of the suggestion content is executed (for example, 5 seconds after starting the special zone effect, 5 seconds after re-changing in the pseudo-relation, 5 seconds after starting the super reach, or when it is decided not to execute (for example, rush failure) It is adapted to change to a normal suggestion display mode when an effect is executed).

  In addition, in this embodiment, in the effect control process process (step S705), a hold display control process for performing control related to the hold display is executed. 58 and 59 are flowcharts showing the hold display control process according to the third embodiment. In the hold display control process, the effect control CPU 101 first executes a hold change pattern determination lottery for determining the hold change pattern of the hold display for the newly generated hold storage (step S3701). Specifically, the pending change pattern is determined using the pending change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 (A).

  FIG. 60A is an explanatory diagram showing a pending change pattern determination table. In each hold change pattern determination table shown in FIG. 60 (A), a determination value corresponding to the hold change pattern is assigned according to a winning determination result (15R probability big hit or 8R probability big hit, super reach loss, etc.). However, in the example shown in FIG. 60 (A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for holding change pattern determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a 15R probability big hit or 8R probability big hit, P01 is 10%, P02 is 15%, P03 is 20%, P04 is 25%. P05 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 30%.

  For example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach, P01 is 70%, P02 is 15%, P03 is 7%, P04 is 5%, and P04 is 3%. Then, P05 is determined as the pending change pattern.

  For example, when the winning determination result is other, P01 is determined as the pending change pattern at a rate of 100%.

  By determining the hold change pattern at such a ratio, the display mode of the hold display or the active display with respect to the 15R certainty variation big hit or the 8R certainty variation big hit has the reliability of white <red <gold.

  In addition, the pending change pattern in the present embodiment is a pending change pattern that does not become "red" (hereinafter, may be referred to as "no red"; for example, P01.) And a pending change pattern that becomes "red" (hereinafter, "red"). It may be referred to as “with red.” For example, other than P01). Therefore, the selection ratios with and without red are shown in FIG.

  As shown in the figure, when the winning determination result is a 15R probability variation big hit or an 8R probability variation big hit, 90% of the time with red is selected, and 10% of the time without red is selected. If the result of the determination at the time of winning is out of super reach, 30% is selected to have red and 70% is selected to have no red. If the winning determination result is any other, 100% is selected without red.

  In this embodiment, when the selection ratio of execution of the special zone effect is compared with the selection ratio with red shown in FIG. 60 (B), when the winning determination result is 15R certainty variation jackpot or 8R certainty variation jackpot, While the selection ratio with red is higher than the ratio of executing special zone effects, if the winning judgment result is out of reach, the selection ratio with red is lower than the ratio of executing special zone effects. Has become. Therefore, when there is red, the reliability of the 15R certainty variation big hit or the 8R certainty variation big hit is higher than when the special zone effect is selected. That is, in the present embodiment, displaying the hold display or active display in the display mode of “red” is configured to have higher reliability than the special zone effect.

  In the present embodiment, P02 to P05 can be selected only when the winning determination result is 15R certainty variation big hit, 8R certainty variation big hit, or lack of super reach, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, P02 to P05 may be selectable even if the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit, a small hit, a loss of normal reach or a loss of non-reach.

  Next, the effect control CPU 101 stores the data indicating the hold change pattern determined in step S3701 in the storage area in the start prize winning command storage area (the storage area corresponding to the total number of held storages), thereby changing the hold. The pattern is stored (step S3702). When the stored pending change pattern is the pending change pattern without change (P01 or P03), the process proceeds to step S3710. When the stored pending change pattern is the pending pending change pattern (any one of P02, P04, and P05), the change timing determination lottery for determining the change timing is performed (step S3704). Specifically, the change timing is determined using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (A) or the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B).

  FIG. 61A is an explanatory diagram showing a first change timing determination lottery table. FIG. 61B is an explanatory diagram showing a second change timing determination lottery table. In each of the change timing determination lottery tables shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B), a judgment value corresponding to the change timing is assigned for each total number of pending storages, but shown in FIGS. 61 (A) and 61 (B). In the example, for simplification of the description, the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for change timing determination lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, the case where the change timing determination lottery is performed using the first change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61A will be described. The first change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is a big hit.

  For example, when the total pending storage number is “1”, the change timing is determined to be 60% in the active state and 40% in the active start time.

  For example, when the total pending storage number is "2", the active timing is determined at a rate of 50%, the active start time is determined at a rate of 30%, and the first change timing is determined at a rate of 20%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “3”, 40% of the time is active, 30% is the time of active start, 20% is the first, and 10% is the second. The eyes are determined as the timing of change.

  For example, when the number of total pending storage is “4”, 30% of the active memory is active, 25% of the active memory is active, 20% is the first active, and 15% is the second active. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the number of total pending storage is “5”, 22% of the active memory is active, 20% of the active memory is active, 18% is the first active memory, and 16% is the second active memory. The third eye is determined as a change timing at a rate of 14%, and the fourth eye is determined as a change timing at a rate of 10%.

  For example, when the number of total pending storage is “6”, 22% of the active memory is active, 18% of the active memory is active, 16% is the first active memory, and 14% is the second active memory. The eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 12%, the third at the rate of 10%, the fourth at the rate of 10%, and the fifth at the rate of 8%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storages is “7”, 20% of the active memory is active, 18% of the active memory is active, 16% is the first active memory, and 14% is the second active memory. The eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 12%, the third at the rate of 10%, the fourth at the rate of 10%, the fifth at the rate of 6%, and the sixth at the rate of 4%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “8”, 20% of the active memory is active, 18% of the active memory is active, 16% is the first active memory, and 14% is the second active memory. The eye is the third at a rate of 12%, the fourth at a rate of 8%, the fifth at a rate of 6%, the sixth at a rate of 4%, and the seventh at a rate of 2%. The eyes are determined as the timing of change.

  Next, a case where the change timing determination lottery is performed using the second change timing determination lottery table shown in FIG. 61B will be described. The second change timing determination lottery table is a change timing determination lottery table used when the winning determination result is out of super reach.

  For example, when the total pending storage number is "1", the active timing is determined as 40%, and the active start time is determined as 60% as the change timing.

  For example, when the total pending storage count is "2", the active timing is determined at a rate of 20%, the active start time is determined at a rate of 30%, and the first change timing is determined at a rate of 50%.

  For example, when the number of total pending storage is “3”, 10% of the active memory is active, 20% of the active memory is active, 30% is the first active, and 40% is the second active. The eyes are determined as the timing of change.

  For example, if the total number of pending storage is “4”, 10% of the active memory is active, 15% of the active memory is active, 20% is the first active, and 25% is the second active. The third eye is determined as the change timing at a rate of 30%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storage is “5”, 10% of the active memory is active, 14% of the active memory is active, 16% is the first active memory, and 18% is the second active memory. The third eye is determined as a change timing at a rate of 20%, and the fourth eye is determined as a change timing at a rate of 22%.

  For example, if the total number of pending storages is “6”, 8% is active, 10% is active, 12% is the first, and 14% is two. The third eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 16%, the fourth eye at the rate of 18%, and the fifth eye at the rate of 22%.

  For example, when the total number of pending storage is “7”, 4% indicates that the memory is active, 6% indicates that the active state is starting, 10% indicates the first, and 12% indicates the two. The eye is determined as the change timing at the rate of 14%, the third at the rate of 16%, the fourth at the rate of 16%, the fifth at the rate of 18%, and the sixth at the rate of 20%.

  For example, when the number of total pending storage is “8”, 2% is active, 4% is active, 6% is the first, 8% is 2 The eye is the third at a rate of 12%, the fourth at a rate of 14%, the fifth at a rate of 16%, the sixth at a rate of 18%, the seventh at a rate of 20%. The eyes are determined as the timing of change.

  As described above, the present embodiment has a configuration in which it is easier to determine a timing earlier than the start of the hold display as the change timing in the case of a big hit, rather than in the case of a big hit. Therefore, as the timing at which the display mode of the hold display or the active display changes, the reliability with respect to the big hit is higher when the hold display is started later. On the contrary, the reliability of the big hit may be higher as the hold display is started earlier, or the change timing may not show the reliability of the big hit.

  In the present embodiment, when the winning determination result is neither a big hit nor a super-reach (in other cases), only P01 can be selected as the pending change pattern. Although the determination lottery table is not provided, it is considered that the other change timing determination lottery table is provided as long as it is a configuration that allows selection of a pending change pattern in which the display mode changes even in other cases. Good.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 stores the determined change timing in the start prize-winning command storage area (step S3705). When the pending change pattern stored in step S3702 is a pending change pattern in which the number of changes is two (that is, P04) (Y in step S3706), the change timing determination lottery is performed again (step S3707), and the decision is made. When the change timing thus determined is different from the change timing stored in step S3705 (N in step S3708), the change timing determined in step S3707 is stored in the start winning command storage area (step S3709). When the change timing determined in step S3707 is the same as the change timing stored in step S3705 (Y in step S3708), the change timing determination lottery (until the change timing different from the change timing stored in step S3705 is determined). Step S3707) is repeatedly executed. In this way, two different change timings are decided. Note that a plurality of combination patterns of two change timings are provided, and it is possible to collectively determine the two change timings by selecting one of them.

  After that, the effect control CPU 101 executes a process (steps S3710 to S3725) related to displaying the hold display in the effect suggestion display mode. Specifically, the processing includes a first processing (steps S3710 to S3713) related to displaying the hold display in the first special suggestion mode and a second processing related to displaying the hold display in the second special suggestion mode. Processing (steps S3714 to S3717), third processing (steps S3718 to S3721) related to displaying the hold display in the pseudo-link suggestion mode, and fourth processing related to displaying the hold display in the SP suggestion mode (step). S3722 to S3725) are included.

  Hereinafter, the hold display in the first special suggestion mode is "first special suggestion hold", the hold display in the second special suggestion mode is "second special suggestion hold", and the hold display in the pseudo continuous suggestion mode is "pseudo continuous suggestion hold". , The hold display in the SP suggestion mode may be referred to as “SP suggestion hold”.

  First, the effect control CPU 101 determines whether or not the new pending storage is scheduled to enter the special zone of the notice target (step S3710). For example, a flag is set when it is decided to rush into the special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that new pending storage is scheduled to rush into the special zone of the notice target. .

  When the new reserved memory is scheduled to enter the special zone of the notice target, the first special suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the first special suggestion reservation is performed (step S3711). Specifically, the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62A is used to determine whether or not to execute the first special suggestion hold.

  FIG. 62 (A) is an explanatory diagram showing a first special suggestion execution lottery table. In the first special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (A), determination values corresponding to presence / absence of execution of the display of the first special suggestion suspension are assigned for each of the winning determination result and the suspension change pattern. In the example shown in FIG. 62 (A), the ratio of the assigned determination values is shown to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the first special suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is 15R probability big hit or 8R probability big hit, if the hold change pattern is P01, it is possible to display the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 40% at a rate of 60%. It is determined not to display the first special suggestion hold. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 20%. It

  For example, if the winning determination result is out of super reach, and if the hold change pattern is P01, displaying the first special suggestion hold at a rate of 30% is the first special suggestion at a rate of 70%. It is determined not to display the hold. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the first special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the first special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 40%. It

  When it is determined to execute the display of the first special suggestion hold, the display of the first special suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3713).

  If the new reserved storage is not scheduled to enter the special zone of the notice in step S3710, or if the display of the first special suggestion hold is not executed in step S3712, the effect control CPU 101 causes the new reserved storage to enter the notice of the notice. There is a case where the notice production is executed (when it is planned to move to the special zone (when the successful entry effect is planned to be executed), and when it is planned not to move to the special zone but the entry failure effect is planned to be executed. Is included (step S3714). For example, a flag is set when it is decided to rush into the special zone, and if the flag is set, it is determined that the new pending storage is to execute the rush success effect of the notice target. Is. In addition, for example, a flag is set when it is decided to execute the inrush failure effect, and if the flag is set, it is planned that the new pending storage will execute the inrush failure effect for which the notice is given. It is a judgment.

  If the rush advance notice effect is to be executed, a second special suggestion execution lottery for determining whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold is performed (step S3715). Specifically, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62B is used to determine whether or not to display the second special suggestion hold.

  FIG. 62B is an explanatory diagram showing a second special suggestion execution lottery table. In the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 61 (B), a rush success effect is executed as a determination value corresponding to the winning determination result and the presence / absence of display of the second special suggestion hold for each hold change pattern. Different values are assigned depending on whether to perform the rush failure effect or not, but in the example shown in FIG. 62 (B), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. There is. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the second special suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  First, a case where the winning determination result is a 15R certainty variation big hit or an 8R certainty variation big hit will be described.

  For example, when the rush success effect is planned to be executed (when it is planned to move to the special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold may be executed at a rate of 40%. , 60%, it is determined not to display the second special suggestion hold display. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 80% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 20%. It

  For example, when the rush failure effect is to be executed (when the special zone is not planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the second special suggestion hold display may be executed at a rate of 80%. , 20%, it is determined not to display the display of the second special suggestion hold. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 40% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 60%. It

  Next, a case where the winning determination result is out of super reach will be described.

  For example, when the rush success effect is planned to be executed (when it is planned to move to the special zone), if the hold change pattern is P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold may be executed at a rate of 30%. , 70% does not display the second special suggestion hold display. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 60% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 40%. It

  For example, when the rush failure effect is to be executed (when the special zone is not planned), if the hold change pattern is P01, the second special suggestion hold display may be executed at a rate of 60%. , 40%, it is determined not to display the second special suggestion hold display. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a rate of 30% and the display of the second special suggestion hold is not performed at a rate of 70%. It

  Finally, the case where the winning determination result is other will be described.

  For example, if a rush failure effect is planned to be executed (if it is not planned to move to the special zone), the display of the second special suggestion hold should not be executed at a rate of 100% regardless of which hold change pattern. Is determined. In the present embodiment, when the winning determination result is other, the special zone is not rushed. Therefore, it is determined whether the second special suggestion hold display is performed when the rush success effect is executed. No decision value has been assigned to determine.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed in the second special suggestion mode only when the winning determination result is the 15R certainty variation big hit, the 8R certainty variation big hit, or the super reach loss. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the winning determination result is a sudden change big hit, a small hit, a loss of normal reach, or a loss of non-reach, it is possible to display the hold display in the second special suggestion mode. Good.

  In this way, when the hold change pattern is other than P01, the display of the second special suggestion hold is performed at a higher rate when the rush success effect is executed than when the rush failure effect is executed. It is configured. That is, when the display of the second special suggestion suspension is executed, the display mode is more likely to change to “red” when the user enters the special zone than when the user does not enter the special zone. The display mode may not change to "red" when the special zone is not entered.

  Here, the second special suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (B) is compared with the red-holding selection rate shown in FIG. 60 (B). For example, when the winning determination result is the 15R probability variation big hit or the 8R probability variation big hit, the selection rate with red is 90% (see FIG. 60 (B)), while the execution rate of the second special suggestion holding is 90. % (See FIG. 62 (B)). Also, for example, when the winning determination result is out of super reach, the selection ratio with red is 30% (see FIG. 60 (B)), while the execution ratio of the second special suggestion holding is 30% or more. (See FIG. 62B). Therefore, the reliability with respect to the 15R certainty variation jackpot or the 8R certainty variation jackpot is red hold> second special suggestion hold.

  When it is determined to execute the display of the second special suggestion hold, the display of the second special suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3717).

  In step S3714, if the new pending storage does not execute the rush advance notice effect of the notice target, or if the display of the second special suggestion pending is not executed in step S3716, the effect control CPU 101 causes the new pending storage to be pseudo-linked. It is determined whether or not the pseudo continuous hold is set (step S3718). If it is a pseudo-relationship hold, a pseudo-relationship execution lottery for determining whether to display the pseudo-repair suggestion hold is performed (step S3719). Specifically, it is determined whether or not the pseudo-relational suggestion hold display is executed using the pseudo-relational suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C).

  FIG. 62C is an explanatory diagram showing a pseudo-linkage suggestion execution lottery table. In the pseudo-relationship suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C), determination values corresponding to presence / absence of execution of display of pseudo-relationship suggestion suspension are assigned for each winning determination result and suspension change pattern. In the example shown in (C), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown in order to simplify the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for the pseudo-linkage suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, if the winning determination result is a big hit and the pending change pattern is P01, the pseudo-relational suggestion hold display may be executed at a rate of 20% and the pseudo-repetitive suggestion hold display at a rate of 80%. It is decided not to execute. If the pending change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the pseudo-relational suggestion hold display is performed at a rate of 30% and the pseudo-relational suggestion hold display is not performed at a rate of 70%.

  For example, if the winning determination result is out of order, if the hold change pattern is P01, the pseudo-relationship suggestion hold display may be executed at a rate of 10%, or the pseudo-relationship suggestion hold display at a rate of 90%. It is decided not to execute. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the pseudo-relationship suggestion hold display is performed at a rate of 20% and the pseudo-relationship suggestion hold display is not performed at a rate of 80%.

  When it is determined to execute the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold, the display of the pseudo-link suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3721).

  When the new pending storage is not the pseudo continuous pending in step S3718, or when the display of the pseudo continuous suggesting pending is not executed in step S3720, the effect control CPU 101 is the SP reach pending in which the new pending storage develops into the super reach. It is determined whether or not (step S3722). If it is the SP reach hold, the SP suggestion execution lottery for determining whether to display the SP suggestion hold is performed (step S3723). Specifically, the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62D is used to determine whether or not the SP suggestion suspension display is to be executed.

  FIG. 62D is an explanatory diagram showing an SP suggestion execution lottery table. In the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D), determination values corresponding to presence / absence of execution of SP suggestion pending display are assigned for each winning determination result and pending change pattern. In the example shown in (), the ratio of the assigned determination value is shown for simplification of the description. The effect control CPU 101 extracts, for example, a random number for SP suggestion execution lottery, and determines the determination item to which a determination value that matches the extracted random number is assigned.

  For example, when the winning determination result is a big hit, if the hold change pattern is P01, the SP suggestion hold display is performed at a rate of 30%, and the SP suggestion hold display is not performed at a rate of 70%. Is decided. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the SP suggestion hold display is performed at a rate of 40% and the SP suggestion hold display is not performed at a rate of 60%.

  For example, if the winning determination result is out of order, and the hold change pattern is P01, the SP suggestion hold display is executed at a rate of 20%, and the SP suggestion hold display is not performed at a rate of 80%. Is decided. If the hold change pattern is other than P01, it is determined that the SP suggestion hold display is performed at a rate of 30% and the SP suggestion hold display is not performed at a rate of 70%.

  When it is determined to execute the hold display in the SP suggestion mode, the display of the SP suggestion hold is started as the hold display for the new hold storage (step S3725).

  Here, comparing the pseudo-linkage suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (C) with the SP suggestion execution lottery table shown in FIG. 62 (D), when the pending change pattern is other than P01, the pseudo-linkage execution lottery table is shown. The execution rate of the suggestion pending display is different from the execution rate of the SP suggestion pending display. That is, the effect suggestion display mode is changed to "red" at a different ratio based on the type of effect suggestion display mode. Thereby, it is possible to draw attention to the type of the effect suggestion display mode.

  If the new hold storage is not SP reach hold in step S3722 or if the display of SP suggestion hold is not executed in step S3724, the effect control CPU 101 displays in the display mode according to the hold change pattern stored in step S3702. The display of the hold display for the new hold storage is started (step S3726). Specifically, if any of P01, P02, and P04, the hold display is started with "white", and if it is P03 or P05, the hold display is started with "red".

  In addition, in the present embodiment, as shown in steps S371 to S3725, the display timing of the hold display in the effect suggesting mode is the start winning a prize, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display or the active display in the effect suggestion mode may be displayed at any timing, such as during shift of the hold display, during variable display, or during active display.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the execution priority (that is, the execution frequency) is the first special suggestion mode> the second processing by executing the processing in the order of the first processing, the second processing, the third processing, and the fourth processing. It is conceivable that the special suggestion mode> the pseudo-relationship mode> the SP suggestion mode. Therefore, for example, it is possible to collectively determine which of the first special suggestion mode, the second special suggestion mode, the pseudo-relational suggestion mode, and the SP suggestion mode to display the hold display or the active display. By providing such a table, it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased. Alternatively, as in the case of the present embodiment, even if the lottery is performed in order to execute the hold display or the active display in each effect suggestion display mode, the execution ratio is lowered as the lottery is executed first. By performing (the higher the execution ratio in the lottery executed later), it is possible to prevent the execution priority (execution frequency) from being biased.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the hold display can be displayed only in a single effect suggestion display mode among a plurality of effect suggestion display modes, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. For example, when it is determined to execute the hold display in the first special suggestion display mode and the SP suggestion display mode, the hold display including the characters "special" and "SP" is displayed. Good. Specifically, by executing the above-described first processing to fourth processing independently, the hold display may be displayed in a plurality of effect suggestion display modes. Since the notice productions suggested by the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode are special zone productions, the hold display is made in both the first special suggestion display mode and the second special suggestion display mode. It may be configured not to be executed. For example, the hold display in the first special suggestion display mode may be displayed with priority over the hold display in the second special suggestion display mode.

  FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the effect symbol variation process (step S802) in the third embodiment. In the effect symbol changing process, it is determined whether it is the change timing of the active display (step S4701). Specifically, in the above-mentioned active information storage area, “active” is stored as the change timing, and when a predetermined time (for example, 13 seconds) has elapsed from the start of fluctuation, it is determined that it is the change timing of active display. . Note that, as described above, although “active” is stored as the change timing, but when the change time of the corresponding change is shorter than 13 seconds, 1 second before the change stops is determined as the change timing of the active display. I shall. If it is the change timing of the active display, the display mode of the active display is changed with reference to the pending change pattern in the active information storage area (step S4702). For example, if the pending change pattern is P02, it is changed to "red", and if it is P04 or P05, it is changed to "gold".

  Further, when the hold display or the active display is displayed in the first special suggestion mode (Y in step S4703), it is determined whether it is the end timing of the rush success presentation (step S4704). Specifically, when the inrush success effect is started in a change having a change time of 3 seconds or more, the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed after the start of the inrush success effect is determined to be the end timing of the inrush success effect. When the rush success effect is started during the change having the change time of less than 3 seconds, the timing one second before the stop of the change is determined to be the end timing of the rush success effect. When it is the end timing of the rush success presentation, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the first special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4705). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it is "white", if it is P02, it is "white" before the change timing, and if it is after the change timing, it is "red". If it is P03, it is set to "red", if it is P04, it is set to "white" before both change timings, and if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, it is set to "red". ., After both change timings, it changes to “gold”, when it is P05, it changes to “red” before the change timings, and changes to “gold” after the change timings.

  In addition, when the variation time of the variation that has executed the rush success effect is less than 8 seconds (a period for executing the rush success effect (3 seconds), a hold display or an active display is displayed after the rush success effect is finished. When the variation time is shorter than the total period of the waiting period (5 seconds) until the mode is changed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the change stop.

  When the hold display or the active display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode (Y in step S4706), whether it is the end timing of the rush advance notice effect (rush success effect or rush failure effect). Is determined (step S4707). Specifically, when the rush advance notice effect is started in a change having a change time of 3 seconds or more, it is determined that the timing at which 3 seconds have elapsed since the start of the rush advance notice effect is the end timing of the rush advance notice effect. When the plunge advance notice effect is started during a change having a change time of less than 3 seconds, it is determined that the timing one second before the change stop is the end timing of the plunge notice effect. If it is the end timing of the rush advance notice effect, the display mode of the hold display or the active display displayed in the second special suggestion mode is changed to the display mode according to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4708). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it is "white", if it is P02, it is "white" before the change timing, and if it is after the change timing, it is "red". If it is P03, it is set to "red", if it is P04, it is set to "white" before both change timings, and if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, it is set to "red". ., After both change timings, it changes to “gold”, when it is P05, it changes to “red” before the change timings, and changes to “gold” after the change timings.

  In addition, when the variation time of the variation that executes the rush announcement effect is less than 8 seconds (a period for executing the rush announcement effect (3 seconds), and a display of a hold display or an active display after the rush announcement effect is finished When the variation time is shorter than the total period of the waiting period (5 seconds) until the mode is changed, the display mode of the hold display or the active display is changed 1 second before the change stop.

  If the active display is displayed in the pseudo-link suggestion mode (Y in step S4709), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the pseudo-link (step S4710). Specifically, in the pseudo run, the re-variation is generally started after the chance eye symbol is stopped and displayed, but in step S4710, the first re-variation timing is determined as the start timing of the pseudo run. . The stop timing of the first chance symbol may be determined as the start timing of the pseudo-relation.

  If it is the start timing of the pseudo-relation, the display mode of the active display displayed in the pseudo-recommendation mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4711). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it is "white", if it is P02, it is "white" before the change timing, and if it is after the change timing, it is "red". If it is P03, it is changed to "red", if it is P04, it is changed to "red" if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and if it is after both change timing, it is "gold". , P05, it is changed to “red” before the change timing, and is changed to “gold” after the change timing.

  It should be noted that there is provided a variation pattern in which the variation ends before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the pseudo-relation, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the variation of the variation pattern, the variation stop predetermined value is set. The display mode of the active display may be changed before time (for example, 1 second before).

  Further, when the active display is displayed in the SP suggesting mode (Y in step S4712), it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of the super reach effect (step S4713). Specifically, the predetermined timing for each variation pattern is determined as the start timing of the super reach effect. When it is the start timing of the super reach effect, the display mode of the active display displayed in the SP suggestion mode is changed to the display mode corresponding to the hold display pattern after 5 seconds (step S4714). Specifically, if the hold change pattern is P01, it is "white", if it is P02, it is "white" before the change timing, and if it is after the change timing, it is "red". If it is P03, it is changed to "red", if it is P04, it is changed to "red" if it is after one change timing but before the other change timing, and if it is after both change timing, it is "gold". , P05, it is changed to “red” before the change timing, and is changed to “gold” after the change timing.

  It should be noted that there is a fluctuation pattern in which the fluctuation ends before 5 seconds have elapsed from the start timing of the super reach effect, and when the display mode of the active display is changed during the fluctuation of the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation stop The display mode of the active display may be changed before a predetermined time (for example, 1 second).

  After that, the CPU 101 for effect control decrements the value of the process timer by 1 (step S8101) and decrements the value of the variable time timer by 1 (step S8102). When the process timer times out (step S8103), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S8104). Further, the control state for the effect device is changed based on the display control execution data, the lamp control execution data, and the sound number data set next (step S8105).

  Then, if the variation time timer has timed out (step S8115), the effect control CPU 101 updates the value of the effect control process flag to a value according to the effect design variation stop processing (step S803) (step S8116).

  64 and 65 are explanatory diagrams showing display examples in the case where the hold display is displayed in the second special suggestion mode in the third embodiment. First, (1) during the change in which the active display and the two hold displays are displayed, (2) a new hold storage occurs and the hold display corresponding to the hold storage is the second special suggestion mode (“ "Special?") Is displayed. At this time, it is assumed that it is determined to execute the special zone effect in which the reserved memory is a notice target, and the execution count K is set to "3" and the remaining count R is set to "3". It is also assumed that P04 is determined as the pending change pattern, and the first and second changes are determined as the change timings.

  Then, (3) the variation ends at the gap, and (4) the next variation starts. At this time, the active display corresponding to the new change is displayed and the hold display is shifted. Then, the remaining number R becomes “2”, and the value obtained by adding “1” to the remaining number R becomes the same value as the execution number K, so that the rush advance notice effect is executed. When 3 seconds have passed after that, (5) it is informed that the effect was a successful entry, and the player enters the special zone. At the timing 5 seconds after that, the display mode of the (6) hold display that was displayed in the second special suggestion mode changes to "red" (see step S4708).

  After that, the change ends at (7), and the next change starts (8). At this time, the active display corresponding to the new change is displayed and the hold display is shifted. The hold change pattern of the hold display displayed in "red" is P04, and the change timing includes the first change, so the display mode changes to "gold".

  As described above, according to this embodiment, the gaming machine capable of executing the variable display, and at least the specific display corresponding to the variable display (in this example, the hold display, the active display) Aspect (in this example, “white”), a first specific aspect (in this example, “red”) having a higher degree of expectation than the normal aspect, and a second specific aspect (in this example, effect) that suggests the effect content. Specific display means (in this example, for production control) capable of displaying in any display mode including a suggestion display mode (first special suggestion mode, second special suggestion mode, pseudo-relational suggestion mode, SP suggestion mode) (A portion of the microcomputer 100 that executes steps S3713, S3717, S3721, S3725, S3726, S4702, S4705, S4708, S4711, S4714) and a specific display of the second specific mode. Effect execution means capable of executing the effect of the suggested content (in this example, the same processing as steps S8013 and S8105 according to the process table selected in the same processing as steps S8010 and S8011 in the effect control microcomputer 100). By executing the special zone effect, the pseudo-relation, and the super reach effect), and the specific display means displays the specific display in the second specific mode, and then the second specific mode. When the effect of the content suggested by the specific display is executed (in this example, 5 seconds after the effect of the suggested content is executed), the display mode of the specific display is changed from the second specific mode to the first specific mode. Can be changed to (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 100 executes steps S4702, S4705, S4708, S47). If any of P02 to P05 is selected as the hold change pattern by executing S1 and S4714, the hold display or active display displayed in the effect suggestion display mode that is the second display mode is displayed. , And can be changed to “red” which is the first specific mode). As a result, it is possible to increase the expectation for the specific aspect.

  When the configuration shown in this embodiment is applied to the gaming machine shown in the first embodiment, for example, the first identification mode or the second identification mode shown in this embodiment is the first implementation. It corresponds to the second mode shown in the form, and after the specific display is displayed in the first mode (special hold), the first mode (special hold) is changed to the first specific mode or the second specific mode. It is possible to configure.

  Further, it is possible to configure a gaming machine by appropriately combining the configurations shown in the above-described first to third embodiments. That is, the configurations shown in any one of the first to third embodiments described above are appropriately combined, or the configurations shown in all the embodiments are combined. You may make it comprise a game machine.

[Multiple performance modes for hold display and active display]
Regarding the pending notice effect that changes the display mode of the hold display described above and the effect that changes the display mode of the active display described above (hereinafter, also referred to as active notice effect), the execution ratio of the effect may be different depending on the effect mode. It may be configured to. Hereinafter, an example in which the execution ratio of the pending notice effect and the execution ratio of the active notice effect are changed according to the effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 to 72.

  FIG. 66A is a diagram showing an example of the effect mode selection screen selectable by the player. The effect mode selection screen in the present embodiment is displayed by operating the push button 120 while the game state is the normal state and the effect control CPU 101 is performing the customer waiting demonstration. On the effect mode selection screen, it is possible to select three effect modes of "sunny mode", "rain mode", and "thunder mode".

  In the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the “fine mode” icon 900a is displayed and operate the push button 120, "Sunny mode" is selected as the effect mode of. When the "sunny mode" is selected, the effect control CPU 101 changes the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to a clear scenery including a sun and mountains as shown in FIG. 66 (B). Switch to image. Then, the subsequent variable display of the effect design is executed with the sunny image as the background image.

  In the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the “rain mode” icon 900b is displayed and operate the push button 120, "Rain mode" is selected as the effect mode. When the "rain mode" is selected, the effect control CPU 101 causes the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to represent a rainy landscape including rain clouds and raindrops, as shown in FIG. Switch to image. Then, the subsequent variable display of the effect design is executed with the rain image as the background image.

  On the effect mode selection screen, the player operates the stick controller 122 to move the cursor displayed on the screen to the position where the icon "c of lightning mode" 900c is displayed, and then operates the push button 120. "Thunder mode" is selected as the effect mode of. When the "thunder mode" is selected, the effect control CPU 101 causes the background image displayed on the effect display device 9 to show a scene of a thunder including a thundercloud and a thunderlight as shown in FIG. 66 (D). Switch to image. Then, the subsequent variable display of the effect design is executed with the lightning image as the background image.

  The background image in the sunny mode, the background image in the rain mode, and the background image in the lightning mode are all applied as the background image in the normal state (S640 described above), and if the game state is the time saving state, the time saving state The background image corresponding to the effect mode is displayed (S643 described above), and if the game state is the probability changing state, the background image corresponding to the effect mode in the probability changing state is displayed (S647 described above).

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 66B and 66C, in the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display guide 1000 is displayed in the center of the lower part of the screen, and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001a to the left side of the active display guide. 1001d is displayed, and second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed on the right side of the active display guide. All of these are guide information for notifying the player of the position where the information corresponding to the variable display (hold display and active display) should be displayed, and the information corresponding to the variable display (hold display and active display) is also provided. This is guide information for allowing the player to easily understand whether or not it is displayed.

  The active display guide 1000 displayed at the center of the lower part of the screen indicates the position where the active display should be displayed, and in this example, black-painted frames located at the upper left, lower left, upper right, and lower right corners. It is composed by. When the variable display of the effect symbol is being executed, the active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000, and when the variable display of the effect symbol is not being executed, the active display is displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000. Not done. In the examples of FIGS. 66 (B) and (C), since the variable display of the effect symbols is being executed, the active display is displayed within the frame of the active display guide 1000.

  The first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d displayed on the left side of the lower part of the screen (first hold storage display unit 9a) indicate the position where the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage should be displayed, and in this example, It is a downward facing isosceles triangle. Since the upper limit of the first reserved storage number is 4, four first reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d are displayed. For example, when the first reserved storage number is 4, the first reserved display guides 1001a to 1001d are displayed. A hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is displayed above. In the example of FIGS. 66 (B) and (C), since the first pending storage number is 3, pending displays corresponding to the first pending storage are displayed above the first pending display guides 1001a to 1001c, respectively. The hold display is not displayed above the first hold display guide 1001d. It can be said that the first hold display guide in which the hold display is not displayed above is display information corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol in which the starting condition is not satisfied.

  The second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d displayed on the lower right side of the screen (second hold storage display unit 9b) indicate the position where the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage should be displayed, and in the present example. It is a rectangle. Since the upper limit of the number of second reserved memories is 4, four second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed. For example, when the number of second reserved memories is 4, the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed. On the upper side, a hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed. In the example of FIGS. 66B and 66C, since the number of second reserved memories is 0, a reserved display corresponding to the second reserved memory is displayed above the second reserved display guides 1002a to 1002d. Not displayed. It can be said that the second hold display guide in which the hold display is not displayed above is display information corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol in which the start condition is not satisfied.

  When the variable display of the effect symbols is completed, the active display displayed in the frame of the active display guide 1000 is erased, and each of the hold displays (second hold display) displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d. When the number of pending storages is 0 and the first number of pending storages is 1 or more), or each pending display displayed above the second pending display guides 1002a to 1002d (when the number of second pending storages is 1 or more) ) Is shifted to the center side (active display guide 1000 side) by one, respectively.

  That is, when the number of second holding memories is 0 and the number of first holding memories is 1 or more, the holding display displayed above the first holding display guide 1001a is active display guide along with the execution of the shift effect. Each of the hold displays displayed above the first hold display guides 1001b to 1001d while being shifted and displayed as an active display within the frame of 1000 shifts above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001c, respectively. .

  When the number of second hold storages is 1 or more, the hold display displayed above the second hold display guide 1002a shifts into the frame of the active display guide 1000 and becomes active as the shift effect is executed. The respective holding displays displayed as the display and above the second holding display guides 1002b to 1002d are respectively shifted to above the second holding display guides 1002a to 1002c.

  In the example of the fine mode shown in FIG. 66 (B), the hold display displayed above the first hold display guide 1001b is the target of the hold notice effect and is in red hold, and the first hold display guide is displayed. The other hold displays displayed above the 1001a and the first hold display guide 1001c and the active display are normal modes. Further, in the example of the rain mode shown in FIG. 66C, the hold display and active display displayed above the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001c are all in the normal mode.

  On the other hand, in the lightning mode shown in FIG. 66 (D), unlike the fine mode and the rain mode, both the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d. It is not displayed on the screen, and neither the active display nor the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage and the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage are displayed on the screen. In this example, these display information related to the variable display (active display guide 1000, first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, active display, hold display corresponding to first hold storage , Hold display corresponding to the second hold storage) is not displayed on the screen, but a mode in which these display information are extremely low in visibility, for example, to the extent that the player cannot recognize the contours of these display information May be displayed with low visibility.

  Thus, by selecting the lightning mode as the effect mode, it becomes possible to prevent the active display and the hold display from being displayed on the screen. In addition, even if the active display and the hold display are not displayed on the screen, if the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are still displayed, the game is played. In the lightning mode, the active display guide 1000 and the first display may be mistaken because the person may feel uncomfortable or may change the display state of the effect design and may mistakenly recognize the first reserved memory count and the second reserved memory count. The hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d themselves are not displayed.

  That is, when the effect control CPU 101 can control to a plurality of effect modes in which the visibility of the active display and the hold display is different and the execution ratios of the active notice effect and the hold notice effect are different, the effect selected by the player. By applying an appropriate display layout (display layout related to active display and hold display) according to the mode, the player is prevented from feeling uncomfortable.

  Here, when the lightning mode is selected, there is a problem in that it is difficult for the player to grasp the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 66 (B) to (D), regardless of the selected effect mode, in the effect display device 9, the first reserved storage number is set in the central part at the left end of the screen. A first reserved storage number special display area 1011 for displaying is provided, and a second reserved storage number special display area 1012 for displaying the second reserved storage number is provided in the center of the right end of the screen. In this example, since the first number of reserved storages is 3 and the number of second reserved storages is 0, as shown in FIGS. 66B to 66D, the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 is displayed. Is displayed as "3", and the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 is displayed as "0".

  When the effect control CPU 101 receives the first reserved storage number addition designation command (C000 (H)) from the game control microcomputer 560, the first reserved storage displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011. When the display update that adds 1 to the number is performed and the first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C200 (H)) is received, 1 is output from the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011. Update the display by subtracting. Further, when the effect control CPU 101 receives the second reserved storage number addition designation command (C100 (H)) from the game control microcomputer 560, the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 is displayed. When the display update for adding 1 to the number of reserved storages is performed and the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C300 (H)) is received, the second number of reserved storages displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012. The display is updated by subtracting 1 from.

  As described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 displays the first reserved storage number stored in the game control microcomputer 560 (display control is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side) first special symbol reservation Memory display 18a, and the second reserved memory number stored in the game control microcomputer 560 is displayed (display control is performed on the game control microcomputer 560 side) Second special symbol reserved memory display 18b Is equipped with. That is, the main board 31 side is provided with a display device for performing display update control of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number.

  Then, in the present embodiment, a command received from the game control microcomputer 560, that is, a first reserved storage number addition designation command (C000 (H)) and a first reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C200 (H)), Also, on the basis of the second reserved storage number addition designation command (C100 (H)) and the second reserved storage number subtraction designation command (C300 (H)), the effect control microcomputer 100 side (effect control board 80 side) as well. The display control of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number in the effect display device 9 is performed.

  The display control of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the effect control board 80 side is performed in each of the plurality of portions. That is, display control of a plurality of systems (two systems in this example) is executed. The first is a control for displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the first hold storage number on the first hold display section 9a and a hold display of a number corresponding to the second hold storage number on the second hold display section 9b. The second is control to display the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012. is there. When the effect mode is either the fine mode or the rain mode, both the former and latter display controls are applied, and when it is the lightning mode, only the latter display control is applied. .

(Percentage of execution of notice production in each production mode)
As shown in the icons 900a to 900c corresponding to each effect mode in FIG. 66 (A), in the clear mode, the execution ratio of the pending notice effect (and the active notice effect) is the highest among the three effect modes, The execution ratio of each effect is set so that the execution ratio of the changing notice effect (excluding the active notice effect, which is the notice effect targeting the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied) is the lowest among the three effect modes. Has been done.

  Further, in the rain mode, the execution ratio of the pending notice effect (and the active notice effect) is the second highest among the three effect modes, and the changing notice effect (the notice effect for the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied is a target. The execution ratio of each effect is set such that the execution ratio of (except for the active notice effect) is the second highest among the three effect modes.

  In the lightning mode, the pending notice effect (and the active notice effect) is not executed (the execution ratio is 0), and the changing notice effect (the notice effect for the variable display where the start condition is satisfied is the active notice). The execution ratio of each effect is set so that the execution ratio of (excluding effects) is the highest among the three effect modes.

  FIG. 67 is a diagram showing the execution ratio of the pending notice effect in each effect mode. As shown in FIG. 38 and FIG. 39 described above, the final display mode (whether or not to execute the hold notice effect) in the hold notice effect is determined based on the latest variable category command and the first hold storage number ( S6005), in the case of executing the suspension notice effect (Y in S6006), the change pattern is determined based on the latest variation category command, the first number of stored suspensions, and the determined final display mode (S6007).

  As shown in FIG. 67, (A) [non-reach misses, 2 holdings], (B) [super reach misses, 2 holdings], (C) [super reach jackpot, 2 holdings], ( Any of D) [non-reach, 3-4 holdings], (E) [super-reach, 3-4 holdings], and (F) [super-reach jackpot, 3-4 holdings] Even in the case, of the three effect modes, the ratio in which the hold announcement effect is executed in the sunny mode (the ratio in which the final display mode is normal hold (with special hold), blue hold, and red hold) Is the highest. In addition, the allocation of the final display mode in the sunny mode is the same as the ratio illustrated in FIGS. 38 and 39.

  In addition, (A) [non-reach out, for two hold], (B) [super reach out, two for hold], (C) [super reach jackpot, two hold], (D) [non-reach] In any of the cases of "departure, hold 3 to 4 pieces", (E) [super reach release, hold 3 to 4 pieces], and (F) [super reach jackpot, hold 3 to 4 pieces] In the mode, the rate of execution of the hold announcement effect (the rate in which the final display mode is either normal hold (with special hold), blue hold, or red hold) is about half that in the clear mode.

  On the other hand, (A) [non-reach out, for two hold], (B) [super reach out, two for hold], (C) [super reach jackpot, two hold], (D) [non-reach] In any of the cases of "disappearance, hold 3 to 4 pieces", (E) [super reach release, hold 3 to 4 pieces], and (F) [super reach jackpot, hold 3 to 4 pieces] In the lightning mode, display information related to the hold display (first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, hold corresponding to the second hold storage. Since (display) is not displayed, the pending notice effect is not executed (the execution rate of the pending notice effect is 0%).

  Further, in the present embodiment, also in the active notice production, the sunny mode has the highest execution rate and the rain mode has the second highest execution rate (for example, the active notice production is executed at a rate of about half of the fine mode). In the lightning mode, since the display information (active display and active display guide 1000) related to the active display is not displayed, the active notice effect is not executed (the active notice effect execution rate is 0%).

  In the clear mode and the rain mode, display information related to the hold display (first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, hold display corresponding to the first hold storage, second hold storage). While the shift effect can be executed because the hold display corresponding to is displayed, the shift effect is not executed in the thunder mode because the display information related to the hold display is not displayed.

  If the hold display is kept displayed in the lightning mode in which the hold announcement effect is not executed, the interest may be deteriorated by the display of the hold display, which cannot be expected to change for the player. There is. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the lightning mode in which the hold announcement effect is not executed, the hold display itself is not displayed to prevent a decrease in interest. In addition, if only the active display is displayed when the hold display is not displayed, the player may feel uncomfortable. Therefore, the active display is not displayed in the lightning mode.

  In the clear mode and the rain mode, the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d, which are information related to the hold display, the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d, and the active display guide 1000 that is information related to the active display are displayed. On the other hand, in the lightning mode, this information is erased (hidden), and an appropriate display layout according to the production mode is adopted so as not to give the player a misunderstanding or discomfort. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 66 (A), if the player wants to display the hold display on the effect mode selection screen and execute the hold advance notice effect at a high rate, the player selects the clear mode and displays the hold display to zero. Not select the rain mode if you want to execute the hold announcement effect at a low rate, or select the thunder mode if you do not want to display the hold indication and do not execute the hold announcement effect. It is possible to play a game in a corresponding production mode. Further, among the effect modes in which the hold display can be displayed, it is possible to select the effect mode (sunny mode or rain mode) according to whether or not to execute the hold notice effect at a high rate. Diversity can enhance interest.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 66 (D), in the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed, the control for displaying the first hold storage number in the first hold storage number special display area 1011 and the second hold storage number for the second hold By displaying in the memory number special display area 1012, the player can grasp the number of memory to be retained without displaying the memory.

(Preliminary performance executed in each performance mode)
Next, specific examples of the notice effect executed in each effect mode of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72. FIG. 68 is a timing chart showing the execution timing of various effects executed in the variable display when the variable display of the effect symbols is executed based on the variable pattern accompanied by the reach effect in each effect mode.

  It is assumed that, at the timing T0 in FIG. 68, the effect control CPU 101 starts the variable display of the effect symbols based on the reception of the change pattern command designating the change pattern with the reach effect. At this time, when the effect mode is either the fine mode or the rain mode, there is a possibility that the special hold display timing is present in the first hold memory. If there is a special hold display timing, the effect control CPU 101 changes the special hold display timing hold display to special hold (processing of step S8005 in FIG. 43).

  Further, when the effect mode is one of the sunny mode and the rain mode, the effect effect is executed in the first hold memory (a mode that acts on the hold display, and the display mode of the hold display changes. There is a possibility that there is an executable timing of the production that suggests that. If there is a timing at which the action effect can be executed in the first hold memory, the effect control CPU 101 changes the hold display as an action effect determination table for determining the presence and type of the action effect. A table according to the mode is selected (step S8007 in FIG. 43). Then, the effect control CPU 101 uses the selected effect effect determination table to perform a lottery process based on a random number to determine the presence and type of the effect effect (step S8008).

  When it is determined to execute the action effect (Y in step S8009), the effect control CPU 101 selects a process table according to the variation pattern and the type of action effect determined in step S8008 (step S8010). . Then, the process proceeds to step S8012. As a result, during the period from (T1) to (T3) in FIG. 68, a character appears and the character throws a ball toward the special hold as an action effect (an effect). See (5) and (8) of FIG. 50, and (5) and (8) of FIG. 51).

  On the other hand, when the effect mode is the lightning mode, the hold display is not displayed, the display mode of the hold display does not change, and the action effect is not executed. There is a possibility that the interest may decline from the beginning of the display to the first half. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the lightning mode, in the other effect modes (fine mode and rain mode), the blackout notice effect (the period from T1 to T3) and the period corresponding to the period in which the action effect is executed. By executing the lightning effect advance notice production (T2 to T3), a decline in interest is prevented.

  FIG. 69 shows a specific example of the blackout advance notice effect and the lightning effect advance notice effect. The blackout notice effect and the lightning effect notice notice effect are notice effects that can be executed only in the lightning mode, and are not performed in other effect modes (sunny mode and rain mode). In FIG. 69 (A), when the variable display of the effect design is started in the lightning mode, immediately after that, a predetermined image including the background image (lightning image) displayed on the effect display device 9 is displayed at a predetermined ratio. A blackout advance notice effect in which the visibility is lowered and the visibility becomes difficult is executed (FIG. 69 (B)).

  In this example, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), even in the execution period of the blackout advance notice effect as the difficult-to-visualize effect that reduces the visibility of the image displayed on the effect display device 9, the effect symbol changes. The display is executed in a mode that is smaller than usual on the upper left of the screen, and the player can visually recognize the variable display of the effect symbols. Further, although not shown, it is assumed that the variable display of the fourth symbol is also executed in a visually recognizable manner in the fourth symbol display area. Not limited to such a form, during the execution period of the blackout notice effect, the variable display of the effect symbol may be difficult to visually recognize.

  The blackout notice effect is executed at a rate of 30% when the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a deviating symbol, and at a rate of 70% when the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a big hit symbol. Shall be. The player becomes interested in whether or not the screen becomes dark (whether or not the blackout notice effect is executed) when the variable display of the effect symbol is started in the lightning mode. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest due to the effects and effects not being executed.

  Further, even during the execution period of the blackout notice effect, as shown in FIGS. 69 (B) and (C), the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 (this example 1), and the second reserved storage number (0 in this example) displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 is displayed so that the player can visually recognize it. Even during the production execution period, it is possible to grasp the first number of reserved memories and the second number of reserved memories.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (C), after the blackout notice effect is executed (at the timing of T2 shown in FIG. 68), the image of the thunderbolt is displayed at a predetermined ratio in a manner different from the background image. The lightning effect preliminary announcement is executed. The image of the lightning light displayed in the lightning effect advance notice production has a higher display priority than the background image (the displayed layer is higher than the background image), and is visible to the player even while the blackout notice production is being executed. Possible (displayable on screen).

  The lightning effect preliminary announcement effect is executed at a rate of 10% when the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a deviating symbol, and 90% when the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a jackpot symbol. Shall be. That is, the lightning effect advance notice effect has a higher proportion of a big hit than the blackout notice effect, and is a highly reliable effect. When the blackout advance notice effect is executed, the player becomes interested in whether or not the lightning effect advance notice effect is executed subsequently, so that the pending notice effect and the action effect are not executed in the lightning mode. It is possible to prevent a decrease in interest.

  The lightning effect preliminary announcement effect ends with the end of the blackout preliminary announcement effect (T3 in FIG. 68). As shown in FIG. 69 (D), when the blackout notice effect ends, the background of the lightning image returns to the state where it can be visually recognized again, and the variable display of effect symbols is continued.

  In the present embodiment, the example in which the thunder light effect notice effect can be executed only when the blackout notice effect is executed has been shown, but the invention is not limited to such a form, and the blackout notice effect is executed. Regardless of whether or not the lightning effect advance notice effect may be executed.

  It should be noted that the blackout notice effect may be executable even in the effect mode such as the sunny mode or the rain mode in which the hold display and the hold notice effect can be executed. When the blackout notice effect is executed in the sunny mode or the rain mode, the hold display and the active display become difficult to visually recognize like the background image during the effect period, and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold are displayed. The display guides 1002a to 1002d and the active display guide 1000 are also difficult to see like the background image. However, even during the presentation period, the first reserved storage number displayed in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the second reserved storage number displayed in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012 are Like the example shown in FIG. 69 (B), it is visible to the player.

  That is, the two-system hold storage number display control (display of the hold display on the first hold storage display section 9a and the second hold storage display section 9b, the first hold storage number special display area 1011) executed on the effect control board 80 side. And (display of the number of reserved storages in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012), one (display of the reserved display in the first reserved storage display unit 9a and the second reserved storage display unit 9b) is a blackout notice effect. While the number of reserved storages (the number of displayed pending displays) is difficult to see during the execution period of, the other (the number of reserved storages in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the second reserved storage number special display area 1012) is With respect to the display), the number of retained memories is still visible to the player during the execution period of the blackout notice effect.

  Next, a specific example of the notice effect executed after the reach state is established in each effect mode will be described with reference to FIGS. 70 to 72.

(In sunny mode)
In the case where the effect mode is the clear mode, when the reach effect execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) corresponding to the variation pattern is reached, the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area are the same as shown in FIG. 70 (A). The reach state in which the effect design (“7” in this example) is stopped is established, and the reach effect in which the character 1100 of “REACH !!” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 70 (B), immediately after the reach effect is executed (at the timing shown in T5 of FIG. 68), the cut-in notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. The cut-in notice effect is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit by displaying the cut-in image 1200 and the characters displayed on the cut-in image 1200.

  When the display result of the variable display being executed is a deviating pattern, the cut-in image 1200 is not displayed at a rate of 60%, and the cut-in image 1200 is displayed at a rate of 40%. Here, the character "Chance!" Is displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 38%, and the character "Extreme heat !!" is displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 2%.

  When the display result of the variable display being executed is a big hit symbol, the cut-in image 1200 is not displayed at a rate of 10%, and the cut-in image 1200 is displayed at a rate of 90%. Here, the character "Chance!" Is displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 40%, and the character "Glamorous heat !!" is displayed on the cut-in image 1200 at a rate of 50%.

  Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and when the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, pay attention to the characters displayed there. Therefore, it becomes possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 70 (B), the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the character “intense heat !!” is displayed there, so that the player expects a big hit.

  Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing shown in T6 of FIG. 68), the mode character notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. As shown in FIG. 70 (C), the mode character advance notice effect is an image of a character corresponding to the current effect mode (here, a fine mode) (of a character in which a face of "fine" is displayed in the fine mode). By displaying the image 1300a), it is an effect that suggests the degree of expectation of a big hit.

  When the display result of the variable display being executed is a deviating symbol, the image 1300a of the character corresponding to the fine mode is displayed at a rate of 5%, and the display result of the variable display being executed becomes the big hit symbol. In this case, the character image 1300a corresponding to the clear mode is displayed at a rate of 20%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300a of the character corresponding to the fine mode which is the current effect mode appears after the execution of the cut-in notice effect.

  The mode character advance notice effect can be executed in any of the effect modes (sunny mode, rain mode, and lightning mode) regardless of whether or not the cut-in advance notice effect is executed. When the mode character advance notice effect ends (timing shown at T7 in FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the variable display of the middle symbols in the reach state continues, and finally the display result is derived and displayed. (Timing shown at T8 in FIG. 68).

(In rain mode)
When the production mode is the rain mode and the reach production execution timing (T4 of FIG. 68) corresponding to the variation pattern comes, the same as the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area as shown in FIG. 71 (A). The reach state in which the effect design (“7” in this example) is stopped is established, and the reach effect in which the character 1100 of “REACH !!” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 71 (B), immediately after the reach effect is executed (at the timing shown in T5 of FIG. 68), the cut-in is performed in the same manner and in the same ratio as in the fine mode and the lightning mode described later. The notice production is executed.

  Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and when the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, the characters displayed there. It is possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (B), a cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the characters “intense heat !!” are displayed there.

  Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing shown in T6 of FIG. 68), the mode character notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. That is, as shown in FIG. 71C, an image of a character corresponding to the current effect mode (here, rain mode) (a character image 1300b in which the character "rain" is displayed on the face in the rain mode) is displayed. By doing so, the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested.

  When the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a deviating symbol, the image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode is displayed at a rate of 10%, and the display result of the variable display being executed becomes the big hit symbol. In this case, the character image 1300b corresponding to the rain mode is displayed at a rate of 50%. Therefore, the player is interested in whether or not the image 1300b of the character corresponding to the rain mode, which is the current effect mode, appears after the execution of the cut-in notice effect. When the mode character advance notice effect ends (timing shown at T7 in FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 71 (D), the variable display of the middle symbols in the reach state continues, and finally the display result is derived and displayed. (Timing shown at T8 in FIG. 68).

(In lightning mode)
In the case where the effect mode is the lightning mode, at the execution timing (T4 in FIG. 68) of the reach effect according to the variation pattern, as shown in FIG. 72 (A), the left symbol display area and the right symbol display area are the same. The reach state in which the effect design (“7” in this example) is stopped is established, and the reach effect in which the character 1100 of “REACH !!” is displayed at the top of the screen is executed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), immediately after the reach effect is executed (at the timing shown in T5 of FIG. 68), the cut-in notice effect is produced in the same manner and in the same ratio as in the sunny mode and the rain mode. Is executed.

  Therefore, the player pays attention to whether or not the cut-in image 1200 is displayed immediately after the execution of the reach effect, and when the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, the characters displayed there. It is possible to improve the interest after the reach state is established. In the example shown in FIG. 72 (B), the cut-in image 1200 is displayed, and the characters “intense heat !!” are displayed there.

  Next, immediately after the cut-in notice effect (at the timing shown in T6 of FIG. 68), the mode character notice effect is executed at a predetermined ratio. That is, as shown in FIG. 72C, an image of a character corresponding to the current effect mode (here, a lightning mode) (in the lightning mode, an image 1300c of a character in which the character "thunder" is displayed on the face) is displayed. By doing so, the degree of expectation of a big hit is suggested.

  When the display result of the variable display being executed becomes a deviating symbol, the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the lightning mode is displayed at a rate of 15%, and the display result of the variable display being executed becomes the big hit symbol. In this case, the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the lightning mode is displayed at a rate of 90%. Therefore, the player becomes interested in whether or not the image 1300c of the character corresponding to the current effect mode, the lightning mode, appears after the cut-in notice effect is executed. When the mode character advance notice effect ends (timing shown at T7 in FIG. 68), as shown in FIG. 72 (D), the variable display of the middle symbols in the reach state continues, and finally the display result is derived and displayed. (Timing shown at T8 in FIG. 68).

  In this way, the types of noticeable effects that can be executed differ depending on the effect mode (for example, the blackout notice effect and the lightning effect effect notice effect can be executed only in the lightning mode), so the player must The player will be interested in the notice effect executed in the mode, and will be interested in which effect mode is selected.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the cut-in notice production can be executed immediately after the reach state is established in any of the production modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode. In this way, by enabling execution of a common type of effect regardless of the effect mode, it is possible to prevent an excessive increase in the type of effect and an excessive increase in the storage amount of effect data. You can Further, in the present embodiment, the execution ratio of the cut-in notice effect, and the allocation of each mode when the cut-in notice effect is executed (the ratio of displaying the character "chance!" The rate at which the character “” is displayed is the same regardless of the effect mode. Therefore, the execution control of the cut-in notice effect (for example, a table for determining the execution ratio and the allocation of the modes) can be made common regardless of the effect mode, and the control can be simplified.

  The cut-in notice production execution rate may be different depending on the production mode. For example, the lightning mode has the highest execution rate, the rain mode has the second highest execution rate, and the fine mode has the highest execution rate. The ratio may be low.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the character notice effect, which is one type of notice effect, can be executed in any of the effect modes of the sunny mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode. The character advance notice effect is executed in different modes depending on the effect mode (character image 1300a according to the fine mode, character image 1300b according to the rain mode, image of character 1300c according to the lightning mode). , It is executed at different rates according to the effect mode (the highest execution rate in the lightning mode, the second highest execution rate in the rain mode, and the lowest execution rate in the sunny mode). It is possible to create an interest according to.

  In the present embodiment, regarding the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed and the hold advance notice effect is not executed, the type of the changing notice effect targeting the variable display being executed is the hold display and the hold advance notice effect can be executed. Since there are more effect modes than other effect modes (sunny mode, rain mode) and the execution ratio of the changing notice effect is set higher than that of the other effect modes, the entertaining notice effect and the action effect are not executed, resulting in a decrease in interest. Can be suppressed. Further, in the rain mode in which the execution rate of the pending notice effect is lower than in the sunny mode, the execution rate of the changing notice effect is set to be higher than in the sunny mode. It should be noted that there may be more types of changing notice effects that can be executed in the rain mode than in the clear mode.

  Contrary to the present embodiment, regarding the lightning mode in which the hold display is not displayed and the hold notice effect is not executed, the type of the changing notice effect for the changing display being executed is the hold display and the hold notice. It may be set to be smaller than the other effect modes in which effects can be executed (fine mode, rain mode), and the execution ratio of the changing notice effect may be set to be lower than that in the other effect modes. It is possible to set a production mode suitable for a player who does not like to execute the notice production with high frequency. Further, even in the rain mode in which the execution ratio of the pending notice effect is lower than that in the sunny mode, the execution ratio of the changing notice effect in the changing mode may be set to be lower than that in the sunny mode, and the type of the changing notice effect that can be executed in the rain mode. May be less than in sunny mode.

(Other example of production mode selection screen)
In the above example, the production mode selection screen (FIG. 66 (A)) is displayed on the production display device 9 in accordance with the operation of the player during the period in which the game state is the normal state and the customer waiting demonstration is executed. An example in which an arbitrary effect mode can be selected from "sunny mode", "rain mode", and "thunder mode" has been shown, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and is a period in which a big hit game state is controlled. The effect mode selection screen may be displayed as the effect to be executed by the player, and the effect mode after the jackpot gaming state may be selected by the player.

  That is, the effect control CPU 101 performs any of the effects executed in the big hit display process (S804), the mid-round process (S805), the post-round process (S806), and the big hit end effect process (S807) shown in FIG. As the production mode selection screen is displayed, the production mode in the probability change state or the time saving state after the jackpot gaming state can be selected from “fine mode”, “rain mode”, and “thunder mode” good. During the big hit game state, the player operates the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 to select the effect mode after the big hit game state ends.

  Here, regardless of which production mode is controlled, that is, the fine mode, the rain mode, and the lightning mode, the current game state is the normal state, the probability change state, or the time saving state. Information indicating whether or not is displayed as common information. Further, regarding the number of fluctuation display times (n) executed after being controlled to the time saving state or the remaining number of fluctuation display times (100-n in this example) that can be executed in the time saving state, information common to all the effect modes. Is displayed as.

  There is also a so-called special time (ST) type game machine in which an upper limit value (for example, 60 times) of the variable display count that can be executed in the probability variation state is predetermined. In the ST type gaming machine, the probability variation state is controlled after the jackpot gaming state ends, and when the number of variable displays corresponding to the upper limit value is executed without the next jackpot occurrence, the probability variation state ends and the normal Transition to the state. In such an ST-type gaming machine, the remaining variation display count up to the upper limit value (remaining ST count) is displayed as common information regardless of the effect mode.

  Further, the number of consecutive holidays is displayed as common information regardless of which effect mode is controlled, that is, the sunny mode, the rain mode, or the lightning mode. The consecutive holidays means that the next big hit occurs based on the fluctuation display executed in the probability change state or the time saving state without shifting to the normal state after the end of the one big hit game state, and the number of extended holiday games is " It is calculated by "the number of consecutive holidays +1". Also, the total number of balls paid out to the player during the period when it is controlled to the big hit game state, and the number of balls paid out to the player during the condominium that includes the big hit game state. The value of the number of balls in Renso, which is a value, is also displayed as common information. In this way, in any of the effect modes, the information that the player is interested in is properly displayed.

  In this example, the background image is made different according to the effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to such a form, and the appearing character may be made different according to the effect mode. For example, when a teammate character and an enemy character battle with each other and a battle effect that notifies whether or not a win or loss results in a big hit is executed, the teammate character may be different depending on the effect mode. By selecting the ally character that he / she likes on the effect mode selection screen, the player is controlled to the effect mode in which the notice effect or the battle effect in which the ally character appears is executed.

  Further, in the present embodiment, an example has been described in which the player can select a desired effect mode by operating the stick controller 122 and the push button 120 on the effect mode selection screen, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. Instead, a touch sensor may detect the player's operation to select the effect mode, or a human sensor such as an infrared sensor may detect the player's operation to select the effect mode.

  In addition, in the production mode selection screen, when the player does not select any production mode (when the bush button 120 is not operated within the selection period), a predetermined production mode (so-called default production). Mode). The effect mode controlled in this case may be the effect mode in which the hold display is performed and the execution ratio of the hold announcement effect is the highest (sunny mode), and the hold display is performed and the execution ratio of the hold notice effect is the second. It may be a high production mode (rain mode) or a production mode (thunder mode) in which the hold display is not performed and the hold notice production is not executed. The previously selected effect mode may be automatically selected when the selection operation is not performed this time.

  It should be noted that the effect mode may be switchable regardless of the operation of the player, and when the big hit game state is controlled, the effect control CPU 101 performs a lottery on which effect mode to use, and based on the lottery result. The effect mode after the jackpot gaming state may be determined. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may automatically switch the effect mode every predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times) of variable display (for example, switch in the order of sunny mode, rain mode, and lightning mode). Further, in the case of the ST type gaming machine, the effect mode may be switched according to the remaining variable display number (remaining ST number) up to the above-mentioned upper limit value, for example, the remaining ST number is from 60 times. The sunny mode may be controlled for a period of up to 41 times, the rain mode may be controlled for a period of 40 to 21 times, and the lightning mode may be controlled for a period of 20 times or less. Further, the effect control CPU 101 may automatically switch the effect mode in accordance with the game state (normal state, time saving state, probability variation state). For example, in the normal state, control is performed to a sunny mode or a rain mode, The lightning mode may be controlled in the time saving state and the probability changing state.

(Another example of controlling the display of the number of stored memories)
In the above-described embodiment, the display control of the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number on the side of the effect control board 80 is performed in each of the plurality of regions in the effect display device 9, and the display control of two systems is executed. Has been done. The first is a control for displaying a hold display of a number corresponding to the first hold storage number on the first hold display section 9a and a hold display of a number corresponding to the second hold storage number on the second hold display section 9b. The second is control to display the first reserved storage number in the first reserved storage number special display area 1011 and the second reserved storage number in the second reserved storage number special display area 1012. is there. Not limited to such a form, with respect to the second (latter), the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number are displayed on a display device different from the effect display device 9 on which the hold display is displayed. May be. For example, the liquid crystal display device different from the effect display device 9 (so-called sub liquid crystal device) may be configured to display the first reserved memory number and the second reserved memory number, and above the liquid crystal display device 9 (first special symbol). A display for the first reserved memory number, which is composed of 7-segment LEDs, in the center decoration installed at a position closer to the effect display device 9 than the reserved memory indicator 18a and the second special symbol reserved memory indicator 18b) Also, an indicator for the second reserved storage number may be provided to display the first reserved storage number and the second reserved storage number. Also, two LEDs are provided as a display for the first number of reserved memories, two LEDs are provided as a display for the second number of reserved memories, and the number of reserved memories is turned off by turning off, lighting, and blinking the two LEDs, respectively. 0 to 4 may be indicated (for example, 0 when both lights off, 1 when one lights up, 2 when only the other lights up, 3 when both lights up, 4 when both blink, etc.).

(Other examples of display layout)
In the present embodiment, as described above, the visibility of the active display (whether or not the active display is displayed), the visibility of the hold display (whether or not the hold display is displayed), and the active notice effect There are a plurality of effect modes in which the execution ratio (whether or not the active notice effect is executed) and the execution ratio of the hold notice effect (whether or not the hold notice effect is executed) are different. In the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display and the hold display can be visually recognized, and the active notice effect and the hold notice effect can be executed (the execution ratio is not 0), whereas in the lightning mode. The active display and the hold display are not visible, and the active notice effect and the hold notice effect are not executed.

  Then, in the effect display device 9, the display layout of the information related to the active display and the hold display also differs depending on the effect mode. In the sunny mode and the rain mode, the active display and the active display guide 1000 are displayed, and the hold display and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are displayed, while the thunder In the mode, both the active display and the active display guide 1000 are hidden, and the hold display and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d are hidden.

  In this way, the display layout of the information related to the active display and the hold display is changed according to the effect mode. In the production mode corresponding to the normal state, the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may be displayed while the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may not be displayed. In the effect mode corresponding to the state, the active display guide 1000 and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may be displayed, while the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may not be displayed. Further, in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probability change state, the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may be displayed while the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d may not be displayed.

  Further, the information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d may not be displayed regardless of the game state. For example, in the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guide 1001a. 1001d is displayed (the information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d originally does not exist), while the active display guide 1000 and the first hold display guide 1001a to 1001d may not be displayed (the information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d originally does not exist). That is, in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probability change state, although the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage is displayed, it indicates the position where the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage should be displayed (the starting condition is Information corresponding to the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d (corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol which is not established) is not displayed, and the active display 1000 corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol for which the start condition is established. It is also possible not to display the information corresponding to.

  Further, in the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the hold displays corresponding to the first hold memory are displayed side by side, whereas in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probability change state, the hold corresponding to the second hold memory is held. The displays may be displayed vertically. Further, in the effect mode corresponding to the normal state, the hold display corresponding to the first retained memory is displayed in the normal size or the normal shape (for example, round shape), whereas in the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probability changing state. Alternatively, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage may be displayed in a special size or a special shape larger than the normal size (for example, the shape of the character). As described above, when the game state is the time saving state or the probability changing state (when the game mode is controlled to the effect mode corresponding to the time saving state or the probability changing state) (for example, in the case of Y in S6002 of FIG. 37, ), The execution rate of the pending notice effect is lower than when the game state is in the normal state (when the effect mode corresponding to the normal state is controlled) (in the example of FIG. 37, the pending notice effect is not executed).

  Further, while the active display (and the active display guide 1000) can be displayed and the active notice effect can be executed, the hold display (and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold display guides 1002a to 1002d) can be displayed. A production mode in which the notice display is not performed without executing the hold notice, and an active notice production is not executed without displaying the active display (and the active display guide 1000), while the hold display (and the first hold display guides 1001a to 1001d and the second hold) The display guides 1002a to 1002d) may be displayed, and the display mode may be switched to the effect mode in which the pending notice effect can be executed.

  Also, the proportion of the character selected by the player, the position at which the character is displayed, and the size of the displayed character may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, the position and the size of the number of held memories displayed may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, the position and size of the fourth symbol displayed may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, during the execution of a specific effect such as action effect or battle effect, the variable display of the effect symbol (that is, the variable display of the effect information corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol) is an end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9. Although it is executed in a reduced mode in, the display position and size (reduction degree) of the reduced effect display may be different depending on the effect mode. Further, when the variable display of the effect information corresponding to the variable display of the normal symbol is executed at the end portion of the display screen of the effect display device 9, the display position and the size of the effect information are different depending on the effect mode. You may do it.

  Further, in accordance with the effect mode, the ratio (whether or not to display) the information relating to the content uniquely set by the player (customized content), the position at which the information is displayed, and the information are displayed. The sizes may be different. For example, a ratio (whether or not the level bar is displayed) at which the adjustment information for adjusting the volume or brightness level (for example, a level bar indicating the current volume or brightness level) is displayed, the adjustment information. The position at which is displayed and the size at which the adjustment information is displayed may be different. In addition, not only during the period when the production control CPU 101 is performing the customer waiting demonstration, but also during the period when the variable display of the production symbol (special symbol) is being executed, and during the period when the jackpot gaming state is controlled, It may be possible to display the adjustment information and change the volume level and the brightness level.

  In addition, the number of points awarded based on the type and number of effects performed according to the effect mode (different from the value that can be used in the gaming machine that is granted based on the winning of the game ball in the winning area) However, the position and size at which the experience value is displayed may be different. In addition, regarding a mission effect that notifies a possibility of a big hit depending on whether or not a specific mission has been achieved, a ratio (whether or not to display) information related to the mission effect is displayed according to the effect mode. The display position and the display size of the information may be different.

  Further, depending on the effect mode, whether or not to display the number of balls in the continuous villa mentioned above, the position for displaying the number of balls in the continuous villa, and the size for displaying the number of balls in the continuous villa are made different. Is also good. Further, the proportion of displaying the types of big hits that occur during the extended game (whether or not to display them), the display position of the big hit types, and the size of displaying the big hit types may be different depending on the effect mode. In addition, the ratio of displaying the number of consecutive villas (whether to display the number of consecutive villas), the display position of the number of consecutive villas, and the size of displaying the number of consecutive villas may differ depending on the effect mode.

  In addition, a special variable winning is achieved when the game ball is launched to the right of the center of the game area (when it is hit to the right) rather than when the game ball is launched to the left of the center of the game area (when left-handed). When the game ball is configured to easily win the ball device (including the case where the special variable prize ball device is provided on the right side of the center of the game area), when the display result of the variable display is a big hit symbol , The effect display device 9 performs a display for instructing a right-handed stroke. Depending on the effect mode, the display ratio (whether or not to display), the display position, and the display size of the display for instructing the right stroke may be different.

  Further, when the music (so-called BGM) that is output during execution of the variable display can be selected, the ratio (whether or not to display) the image for selecting the music according to the effect mode, the image The position at which is displayed, the size of the image to be displayed (or the number of selectable songs) may be different.

  Regarding the different example of the display layout according to the effect mode shown above, when the gaming machine includes the effect display device 9 and the liquid crystal display device (so-called sub display device) different from the effect display device 9, these Some of the (two) display devices (for example, sub-display devices) adopt a common display layout regardless of the effect mode, and other display devices (for example, effect display device 9) use the same display layout. Different display layouts may be adopted. In addition, the display layout may be made different depending on the effect mode in both of the two display devices.

(Examples of look-ahead notice effects other than hold notice effects)
In the above-described embodiment, with respect to the variable display in which the start condition is satisfied but the start condition is not satisfied, the variable display to be the target of the preread notice effect is set as the prefetch notice effect for notifying whether or not it is controlled to the advantageous state. Although the pending notice effect for changing the display mode of the corresponding pending display is illustrated, the present invention is not limited to this, and the chance eye notice effect and the look-ahead notice effect for continuously displaying the special display result such as the chance eye pattern over a plurality of fluctuations. It is possible to execute a countdown advance notice effect that counts down the number of remaining changes up to the target change over a plurality of changes as another type of prefetch advance notice effect.

  Here, in the lightning mode, although the pending notice effect is not executed, another type of prefetch notice effect such as a chance eye notice effect or a countdown notice effect may be executable. Then, in the lightning mode, the execution ratio of the other types of pre-reading notice effects may be higher than that of other effect modes capable of executing the hold notice effect (sunny mode and rain mode). Further, in the lightning mode, the types of pre-reading notice productions that can be executed in addition to the holding notice productions may be larger than those of other production modes (the sunny mode and the rain mode) in which the holding notice productions can be executed. According to this, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest due to the suspension notice effect not being executed.

  In the lightning mode, it is also possible not to execute other types of pre-reading notice productions (that is, not to execute any pre-reading notice productions) like the hold notice productions, and other production modes (sunny mode and rain mode). It is also possible to execute other types of pre-reading notice effects at a rate lower than () (however, the execution rate is not 0).

(Example of slot machine)
In the above embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is illustrated as a gaming machine capable of executing variable display and capable of displaying a specific display corresponding to the variable display. However, a gaming machine having such a configuration is a pachinko gaming machine. The slot machine is not limited to 1, and may be a slot machine.

  The slot machine includes a variable display device having a plurality of reels (for example, three reels of a left reel, a middle reel, and a right reel) each having a plurality of types of symbols as identification information drawn on its outer peripheral portion. The player sets the bet number (1 to 3 medals) and operates the start lever to start the rotation of each reel, and the player operates the stop button provided corresponding to each reel. Thus, the rotation is stopped within the range of a predetermined maximum delay time from the operation timing.

  Rotation and stop of each reel is performed by a reel motor corresponding to each reel, and a motor drive circuit corresponding to each reel motor is provided on a game control board that controls a game. A main control unit having a main CPU and the like is provided on the game control board, and the main control unit controls the rotation and stop of the reel motor by transmitting a control command to the motor drive circuit. Then, a prize is generated according to the display result derived when the rotation of all reels is stopped (or according to the internal lottery result regardless of the display result).

  There are various types of winning combinations, such as a small winning combination, a special winning combination, and a re-playing combination. Here, in the winning of the small combination, the player can obtain a profit that a predetermined number of medals are paid out for each type of the small combination. In the winning of the special role, the player can obtain a benefit that the next game is shifted to a gaming state that is advantageous to the player, such as a regular bonus (RB) or a big bonus (BB). In the replay winning combination, it is possible to gain the advantage that the next game can be played without consuming a new medal for setting the bet number.

  In such a slot machine, after the end of the bonus, it is possible to play the game while suppressing the decrease amount of the game value by increasing the winning probability of the re-playing role as compared with the normal time, as a state advantageous to the player. There is one that controls the replay time (which will be referred to as RT) that is possible and ends the RT when an end condition including winning a predetermined falling winning combination is satisfied. In addition, there is one in which the effect state can be controlled at an assist time (referred to as AT) that is a notification period during which a navigation effect (for example, guiding the pushing order) that notifies the internal lottery result can be executed. A state in which the game state is RT and the effect state is controlled by AT is also referred to as assist replay time (ART). By the main control unit sets a flag corresponding to each gaming state, a winning combination, etc., and executes a process corresponding to the set flag (including transmission of a production control command to the sub control unit) The game is controlled. In addition, the production control command for executing the production according to each game state and the winning combination on the production control board side is transmitted from the main control unit to the sub control unit.

  The lottery for the winning combination, the lottery for the AT, the lottery for the RT, the lottery for the ART, and the additional lottery for the number of times AT, RT, and ART are stored in the RAM at the start of the game (immediately after the start switch is operated), for example. The game is performed based on the game state indicated by the current game state flag, and the winning flag of the winning combination is stored. Whether or not the winning combination is actually established is determined by the winning flag and the operation timing of the stop button stored in the RAM.

  In addition, on the production control board 80 of the pachinko gaming machine in the above-described embodiment, a production control CPU 101 that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM that stores a production control program, fixed data, and the like, and a work of the production control CPU 101. Although the RAM for providing the area and the display control unit for executing the processing for determining the control content of the display operation in the effect display device 9 are mounted, the slot machine is also provided with the effect control board in the same manner. And a sub-control unit having a sub-CPU that performs a control operation according to a program, a ROM that stores a program for effect control and fixed data, and a RAM that provides a work area of the sub-CPU, and a display operation in a liquid crystal display device. A display control circuit and the like for controlling the are mounted.

  In such a slot machine, the sub CPU causes the liquid crystal display device to display a specific display corresponding to a game (variable display) that has not been executed in one of the first mode and the second mode. May be. For example, when an advantageous state such as AT, RT, or ART is won, a specific display corresponding to each game controlled to the advantageous state is displayed in the first mode, and then the game (variable display) is displayed. The specific display may be changed from the first mode to the second mode in response to the establishment of the related predetermined condition.

  For example, when 50 games AT are won, the first to 50th specific displays are displayed in the first mode (for example, blue). Then, each time the AT completes one game (every one game ends or each time the bet number is set and the start lever is operated), the first specific display of the first mode is erased, and A movement effect of shifting the specific display after the number one by one (shifting the specific display of the nth to the position of the (n-1) th) is executed. Then, when the AT number addition lottery is performed during the AT period, a specific display of the number corresponding to the AT number including the determined addition number is displayed in the second mode (for example, red). For example, if the remaining ATs are n games and 20 games are added to the additional lottery, each specific display from the first to (n + 20) th is displayed in the second mode. That is, the effect of changing the display mode of the specific display from the first mode to the second mode is executed.

  In addition to the AT, the display control of the specific display may be performed in the case of RT, ART, or the like as in the example of the AT.

  Further, regarding the specific display corresponding to each game, when the possibility of being in the advantageous state is low, the first mode is displayed, and when the possibility of being in the advantageous state is high, the second mode is displayed. good. For example, regarding the specific display outside the AT period, it is displayed in the first mode at a rate of 80% (displayed in the second mode at a rate of 20%), and at the rate of 80% for the specific display within the AT period. It may be displayed in the second mode (displayed in the first mode at a rate of 20%). Further, regarding each specific display displayed during the AT period, when the number of games until the AT ends with respect to the specific display is less than the predetermined number of games, the specific display is performed in the first mode at a rate of 80%. If the number of games until the AT ends with reference to the specific display is equal to or more than the predetermined number of games, the specific display is displayed at 80%. The display may be performed in the second mode (displayed in the first mode at a rate of 20%).

  In the configuration illustrated above, occurrence of a predetermined trigger (for example, winning a winning combination that can be controlled in an advantageous state such as AT, RT, and ART, winning a specific small winning combination, and displaying a specific display) In accordance with the effect lottery for determining whether or not to execute the change effect that changes the mode, etc.), the ratio that is originally displayed in the second mode is high, but is displayed in the first mode. The interest can be enhanced by changing the display mode of the specific display from the first mode to the second mode.

  In this way, with respect to the slot machine that can display the specific display and can execute the change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display, the specific display can be displayed as well as the pachinko gaming machine 1 described above. There is a first effect mode (corresponding to the sunny mode and the rain mode described above) capable of executing the change effect, and a second effect mode (corresponding to the lightning mode described above) in which the specific display is hidden and the change effect is not executed. It shall be. That is, when the second effect mode is selected, the specific display is not displayed and the change effect is not executed, and the first effect mode and the second effect mode are switched by the operation of the player or the like. Is possible.

(Other modifications)
In each of the above-described embodiments, the change time, the type of reach effect, and the presence / absence of pseudo-relationship (effect in which temporary stop and re-changing of symbols are performed once or more during one variable display) are performed. In order to notify the effect control microcomputer 100 of the variation pattern indicating the variation mode, an example in which one variation pattern command is transmitted at the start of variation has been shown, but the variation pattern is produced with two or more commands. You may make it notify to the control microcomputer 100. Specifically, in the case of notifying with two commands, the game control microcomputer 560 determines whether the first command is presence / absence of pseudo-relation, presence / absence of sliding effect, etc. before reaching (so-called if not reaching. A command indicating the variation time and variation mode before the second stop is transmitted, and as the second command, such as the type of reach and the presence / absence of re-lottery production, after the reach is reached (when the reach is not reached, so-called You may make it transmit the command which shows the fluctuation | variation time after the 2nd stop and a fluctuation mode. In that case, the effect control microcomputer 100 may perform effect control in the variable display (variable display) based on the variable time derived from the combination of the two commands. It should be noted that the game control microcomputer 560 may notify the variation time with each of the two commands, and the effect control microcomputer 100 may select a specific variation mode executed at each timing. . When transmitting two commands, two commands may be transmitted within the same timer interrupt, and after a predetermined period has elapsed after transmitting the first command (for example, A second command may be sent (in the timer interrupt). It should be noted that the variation mode indicated by each command is not limited to such an example, and the transmission order can be changed as appropriate. By thus notifying the variation pattern with two or more commands, the amount of data that must be stored as the variation pattern command can be reduced.

  In addition, in each of the above-described embodiments, “the ratio is different” is not limited to only the ratio being different due to the relationship such as A: B = 70%: 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%. , A: B = 100%: 0%, and the ratio is different (that is, one is 100% allocation and the other is 0% allocation).

  In each of the above-described embodiments, for example, a plurality of types of special symbols, effect symbols, "1" to "9" are variably displayed, and the display result is derived and displayed. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variably displayed symbol does not necessarily have to be the same as the derivatized displayed symbol, and a symbol different from the variably displayed symbol may be derivatized and displayed. Further, it is not always necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be executed by alternately lighting and blinking the one type of symbol display. And, even in this case, one type of symbol used for the variable display may be displayed and displayed last, or a symbol different from that one type may be displayed and displayed last. It may be one.

  Further, in each of the above embodiments, a pachinko machine is taken as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is a plurality of types depending on the operation of the operation lever by the player when a predetermined number of bets is set by inserting a medal. When the symbol is rotated according to the stop button operation by the player when the symbol is rotated and the combination of the stopped symbols becomes a specific symbol combination, it is applied to the slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to the player. It is also possible to do so.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media as prizes, and encloses game media such as game balls and encloses points when conditions for granting prizes are satisfied. It can also be applied to a game machine of the type.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, there are probability variation big hits and normal big hits as the types of big hits, and based on the fact that it was determined as probability variation big hits as the type of big hits, the gaming machine controlled to the probability variation state after the big hit game was shown. However, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (the probability variable area may be provided in only one special variable winning ball device, or a plurality of special variable prize balls may be provided). Probability variation area may be provided in part of the device), the probability variation is determined based on the game ball passing through the probability variation area in the special variable winning ball device during the big hit game, and the big hit game It is also possible to apply the configuration shown in each of the above-described embodiments to the gaming machine that is controlled to the probability change state after the end.

  Further, in each of the above-described embodiments, the game control microcomputer 560 side determines whether or not it is a big hit, and a variation time type winning determination (prefetch determination), and a command indicating the winning determination result (designation of symbol). Command, variation category command), and the effect control microcomputer 100 side executes the pending notice effect based on the command indicating the winning determination result, but this is not the only option. For example, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to perform a winning determination (prefetch determination). In this case, for example, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a command designating only the values of the big hit determination random number (random R) and the fluctuation pattern type determination random number (random 2) extracted when the start winning is generated. Alternatively, the effect control microcomputer 100 may be configured to make a winning determination (prefetch determination) based on the values of the random numbers designated by these commands.

  INDUSTRIAL APPLICABILITY The present invention is suitably applied to a gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine in which a player can play a predetermined game.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 Performance display device (main display device)
9a 1st hold | maintenance memory display part 9b 2nd hold | maintenance storage display part 13 1st starting winning a prize mouth 14 2nd starting winning a prize mouth 20 Special variable winning a prize ball device 31 Game control board (main board)
56 CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control 80 Performance control board 100 Microcomputer for performance control 101 CPU for performance control
109 VDP

Claims (2)

A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of displaying a predetermined image,
Corresponding to the pending storage that is information regarding variable display, a plurality of information including a specific display, effect display means capable of displaying in a specific display area in the display means,
Determination means for determining whether or not the advantageous state is controlled before the variable display corresponding to the specific display is executed,
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect including a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
The production mode in the variable display, the production mode control means capable of controlling in a plurality of production modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution rate of the specific production are different,
Display layout associated with a particular view of the display layout of the effect display means depends effect mode,
The effect mode control means is a first effect mode in which a specific display can be displayed during variable display and the specific effect can be executed, and a second effect in which the specific display is hidden during variable display and the specific effect is not executed. Controllable to the mode,
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect that reduces the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when controlled in the first effect mode and in the second effect mode. Execution means,
In the execution period of the predetermined effect, in the predetermined display area, a holding storage number notification unit for notifying the number of holding storage in an area different from the specific display area,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate when controlled in the second effect mode than when controlled in the first effect mode,
During the execution period of the predetermined effect when controlled to the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a special effect that is not executed when controlled to the first effect mode in the predetermined display area,
In the display means, it is possible to display common information in the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that. A gaming machine that can be variably displayed and can be controlled in an advantageous state that is advantageous to the player,
Display means capable of displaying a predetermined image,
A plurality of information including a specific display corresponding to the variable display, effect display means capable of displaying in a specific display area in the display means,
Determination means for determining whether or not a predetermined condition related to variable display is satisfied,
Based on the determination result of the determination unit, a specific effect execution unit capable of executing a specific effect including a change effect that changes the display mode of the specific display,
The production mode in the variable display, the production mode control means capable of controlling in a plurality of production modes in which the visibility of the specific display and the execution rate of the specific production are different,
Display layout associated with a particular view of the display layout of the effect display means depends effect mode,
The effect mode control means is a first effect mode in which a specific display can be displayed during variable display and the specific effect can be executed, and a second effect in which the specific display is hidden during variable display and the specific effect is not executed. Controllable to the mode,
A predetermined effect capable of executing a predetermined effect that reduces the visibility of a predetermined display area including the specific display area when controlled in the first effect mode and in the second effect mode. Execution means,
In the execution period of the predetermined effect, in the predetermined display area, a holding storage number notification unit for notifying the number of holding storage in an area different from the specific display area,
The predetermined effect execution means executes the predetermined effect at a higher rate when controlled in the second effect mode than when controlled in the first effect mode,
During the execution period of the predetermined effect when controlled to the second effect mode, it is possible to execute a special effect that is not executed when controlled to the first effect mode in the predetermined display area,
In the display means, it is possible to display common information in the first effect mode and the second effect mode.
A gaming machine characterized by that.

Images